Interlink Rev.d

USER MANUAL InterLink
B4017 Rev. D
Section I Section II Section III Section IV Section V Section VI Section VII
: : : : : : :
System Description Installation Commissioning Operators Guide Fault Finding Unit Replacement Appendices
Nera Networks AS
InterLink
This page is intentionally left blank

2
B4017
List of Revisions
Rev.
A B
Date
29-04-2002 02-05-2002
What is changed
Initial Version Declaration of Confirmity incorporated in the manual. Section IV Screenshots enlarged to increase readability.
03-07-2002
Earthing warning and battery replacement warning incorporated in the manual. Declaration of Confirmity (informal) incorporated in the manual. Section I, Chapter 2.2.2.1 Figure corrected Section I, Chapter 3.0 AUX SVCE Board introduced. Section II, Chapter 1.3 Changed Section III, Chapter 1.1 Table corrected Section III, Chapter 1.9 New Note Section III, Chapter 1.10 New Note Section III, Chapter 1.11.2 Figure corrected Section III, Chapter 1.11.3 Figure corrected Section III, Chapter 1.11.4 Corrected Section III, Chapter 1.11.6 Table corrected Section III, Chapter 2.1 New Note Section IV Section changed due to new software release (R7D00) Section V, Chapter 1.0 Correction to the Alarm List
B4017
InterLink
Rev.
D
Date
24-03-2003
What is changed
New revision (C) of Declaration of Confirmity. Section IV New Paragraph; 2.1.4.3.1 Space Diversity Combiner Statistics. Section VII New Frequency plans.
B4017
WARNING!
Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal damage to personnel. The eye (Cornea and lens) is easily exposed. Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and should be avoided. In Radio-Relay communication installations, orderly setup for normal operation, the general RF radiation level will be well below the safety limit. In the antennas and directly in front of them the RF intensity normally will exceed the danger level, within limited portions of space. Dangerous radiation may be found in the neighbourhood of open waveguide flanges or horns where the power is radiated into space. To avoid dangerous radiation the following precautions must be taken: r r r During work within and close to the front of the antenna; make sure that transmitters will remain turned off. Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying RF power, turn off transmitters. Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying power, until otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial connectors at closer than reading distance (30 cm). Do not look into an open waveguide unless you are absolutely sure that the power is turned off.
B4017
InterLink

6
B4017
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD" (Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that whenever disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC boards, special precautions to avoid ESD have to be made. These precautions include personnel grounding, grounding of work bench, grounding of tools and instruments as well as transport and storage in special antistatic bags and boxes.
B4017
InterLink

8
B4017
WARNING!
r r
DO NOT remove or insert the Transceiver group with DC power on. To avoid traffic disturbance during maintenance on one of the RF channels in a N+1 protected system, the traffic should be manually locked to the protection channel before any work is started.
B4017
InterLink

10
B4017
WARNING!
This equipment has a connection between the earthed conductor of the d.c. supply circuit and the earthing conductor.
LITHIUM BATTERY WARNING!

Caution. Danger of Explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
B4017
11
InterLink

12
B4017
This section applies only to CE marked equipment

WARNING: Use of this equipment requires a separate license to be applied for by the operator.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)

English Finnish Dutch Hereby, Nera Networks AS, declares that this InterLink is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Nera Networks AS vakuuttaa tten ett InterLink tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/ EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hierbij verklaart Nera Networks AS dat het toestel InterLink in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG Bij deze verklaart Nera Networks AS dat deze InterLink voldoet aan de essentile eisen en aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Par la prsente Nera Networks AS dclare que lappareil InterLink est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Par la prsente, Nera Networks AS dclare que ce InterLink est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables. Hrmed intygar Nera Networks AS att denna InterLink str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EG. Undertegnede Nera Networks AS erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr InterLink overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS, dass sich dieser InterLink in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. (BMWi) Hiermit erklrt Nera Networks AS die bereinstimmung des Gertes InterLink mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG. (Wien)
French
Swedish Danish German
Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.
B4017
13
InterLink

14
B4017
B4017
15
InterLink
16
B4017
B4017
17
InterLink

18
B4017
Table of contents
SECTION I ............................................................. 27
1.0 2.0 Introduction .................................................................. 29 System Overview ......................................................... 2.1 System Configurations ..................................... 2.1.1 Definitions and terms used ............................... 2.1.2 Modes of operation .......................................... 2.1.3 Available system configurations ....................... 2.2 System Layouts ............................................... 2.2.1 Definitions and terms used ............................... 2.2.2 Main racks ....................................................... 2.2.2.1 ETSI and 19 variants ...................................... 2.2.2.2 Waveguide runs ............................................... 2.2.3 Subracks - Smaller Systems ............................ 2.2.3.1 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version .............................................. 2.2.3.2 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version .............................................. 2.2.3.3 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version ...................................................... 2.2.3.4 Layout of Smaller Systems - 1 subrack systems ..... 2.2.4 Subracks - Larger Systems .............................. 2.2.4.1 Transceiver subrack ........................................ 2.2.4.2 Baseband subrack ........................................... 2.2.4.3 Baseband subrack - 3 channel systems ........... 2.2.4.4 Auxiliary subrack .............................................. 2.2.4.5 Layout of Larger Systems - 2 subrack systems 2.2.4.6 Layout of Larger Systems - 3 subrack systems Unit Descriptions ......................................................... 3.1 Modem Board .................................................. 3.2 Interface Baseband Board ............................... 3.3 SVCE Board .................................................... 30 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 35 35 36 36 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 46 46 48 50
19
3.0
B4017
InterLink 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 Supervisory Board ........................................... Auxiliary Services Board .................................. Power Filters .................................................... Alarm Display & Relay Board ........................... Optical Interface BB Boards ............................. Transceiver ...................................................... 52 54 56 58 60 62
SECTION II ............................................................ 65
1.0 Basic Planning ............................................................. 1.1 Installation Material .......................................... 1.2 Installation Tools .............................................. 1.3 Outline Dimensions .......................................... 1.3.1 Rack dimensions, ETSI .................................... 1.3.1.1 2200 mm .......................................................... 1.3.1.2 2100 mm .......................................................... 1.3.1.3 1700 mm .......................................................... 1.3.2 Rack dimensions, 19" ...................................... 1.3.3 Waveguide dimensions .................................... Transportation & Handling .......................................... 2.1 Packing ............................................................ 2.2 Transportation ................................................. 2.3 Handling .......................................................... 2.4 Inspection ........................................................ Equipment Rack Installation ....................................... 3.1 General ............................................................ 3.2 Procedure ........................................................ 3.3 Power & Grounding ......................................... 3.3.1 Rack Top Connections .................................... 3.3.2 AUX Subrack Power Connections .................... 3.3.3 Internal Power Distribution ............................... 3.3.3.1 1+1 Terminal ................................................... 3.3.3.2 1+1 Terminal with AUX Subrack ...................... 3.3.3.3 3+1 Terminal ................................................... 3.3.3.4 3+1 Terminal with AUX Subrack ...................... 3.3.3.5 1+1 Double Terminal ....................................... 3.3.3.6 1+1 Double Terminal with AUX Subrack .......... 3.3.3.7 7+1 Terminal ................................................... 67 68 69 70 70 70 71 72 73 74 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 78 81 81 82 83 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
B4017
2.0
3.0
20
SECTION III ........................................................... 91

1.0 External Connections .................................................. 1.1 Phone Connections ......................................... 1.2 LAN Connections ............................................. 1.3 NI Connections ................................................ 1.4 LCT1 Connection ............................................. 1.5 LCT2 Connection ............................................. 1.6 Alarm Connections ........................................... 1.7 Power Connections .......................................... 1.8 Internal Power Distribution ............................... 1.9 External Connections ....................................... 1.10 SU Serial Channels ......................................... 1.11 Board Interface ................................................ 1.11.1 Slot numbering and board placement ............... 1.11.2 Service Board PABX ........................................ 1.11.3 Service Board (without PABX) ......................... 1.11.4 Auxiliary Services Board .................................. 1.11.5 Interface Baseband Boards .............................. 1.11.6 Modem Board STM-1 ...................................... 93 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 114 117 119 121 123 125
2.0
Configuration ............................................................... 127 2.1 Setting of Subrack address .............................. 127 Power on (incl. NEW-NMS start-up and initial config.) ..... 3.1 General ............................................................ 3.2 Power on ......................................................... 3.3 NEW-Configurator Start-up and connecting to Network Elements ...................... 3.3.1 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT). ................... 3.3.2 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with TCP/IP Connection. ......................................... 3.4 Initial configuration ........................................... Antenna alignment ...................................................... 4.1 Procedure for Coarse-alignment ...................... 4.2 Procedure for Fine-alignment ........................... 4.3 Cross Polarization Adjustment ......................... 4.4 Final Control .................................................... 129 129 129 129 130 130 131 132 132 132 134 134
21
3.0
4.0
B4017
InterLink
SECTION IV ........................................................... 135

1.0 Introduction .................................................................. 1.1 NEW ................................................................ 1.1.1 Versions ........................................................... 1.1.1.1 NEW-NMS ....................................................... 1.1.1.2 NEW-Configurator ........................................... 1.1.2 Graphical User Interface (GUI) ......................... 1.1.2.1 Menus .............................................................. 1.1.2.2 Explorer View ................................................... 1.1.2.3 Physical View ................................................... 1.1.2.4 Schematic View ............................................... 1.1.3 Communication ................................................ 1.1.3.1 Discovering Network Elements ........................ 1.1.3.2 Communication Settings .................................. 1.1.3.3 Serial Port Settings .......................................... 1.1.3.4 TCP/IP Port Settings ........................................ Configuration ............................................................... 2.1.1 NE Node ..................................................... 2.1.1.1 System Configuration and Unit Housekeeping ... 2.1.1.1.1. Alarms ......................................................... 2.1.1.1.2 Supported systems and boards/units .......... 2.1.1.1.3 Board/Unit placement rules ......................... 2.1.1.1.4 Unit Housekeeping Wizard .......................... 2.1.1.1.5 System Change Detected ............................ 2.1.1.1.6 New Board Detected ................................... 2.1.1.1.7 Replacing Boards/Units: .............................. 2.1.1.2 Element ID ................................................... 2.1.1.3 Available Functions ..................................... 2.1.1.4 Notifications ................................................ 2.1.1.5 NE Clock ..................................................... 2.1.1.6 Configuration Upload .................................. 2.1.1.7 Configuration Download .............................. 2.1.1.8 Restore Configuration ................................. 2.1.1.9 SW Versions ............................................... 2.1.1.9.1 Supervisory Board....................................... 2.1.1.9.2 Board/Unit ................................................... 2.1.1.10 SW Download ............................................. 137 137 137 137 138 138 138 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 146 146 146 147 148 151 156 156 157 158 160 161 162 164 166 167 167 168 169 171
B4017
2.0
22
2.1.1.11 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 2.1.2.2 2.1.2.2.1 2.1.2.2.2 2.1.2.2.3 2.1.2.2.3.1 2.1.2.2.4 2.1.2.2.4.1
Remote Reset ............................................. 173 Equipment Node ......................................... 174 NNP Routing ............................................... 174 IP Routing ................................................... 178 General Settings ......................................... 178 Active Routes .............................................. 179 Static Routes ............................................... 180 "Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues ...181 RIP Interfaces .............................................. 182 "Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues .................................................... 184 2.1.2.2.5 IP Routing - OSPF Interfaces ...................... 185 2.1.2.2.5.1 "Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues .................. 186 2.1.2.2.6 OSPF Areas ................................................ 187 2.1.2.2.6.1 "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues ....188 2.1.2.2.6.2 "Add OSPF Area Network Range" and "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogues . 189 2.1.2.3 Communication Ports .................................. 191 2.1.2.4 Antenna ....................................................... 199 2.1.2.5 Frequency ................................................... 200 2.1.2.6 Looping ....................................................... 203 2.1.2.7 OSI Settings ................................................ 205 2.1.3 Supervisory Board Node ............................. 209 2.1.3.1 Protection Switching .................................... 209 2.1.3.1.1 Switch Section ............................................ 209 2.1.3.1.2 Switch Criteria ............................................. 210 2.1.3.1.3 N+1 Systems ............................................... 212 2.1.3.1.4 Switch Configuration ................................... 214 2.1.3.1.5 Manual Switch Control ................................ 217 2.1.3.1.6 Hot Stand-by Systems ................................. 220 2.1.3.1.7 Switch Configuration ................................... 222 2.1.3.1.8 Manual Switch Control ................................ 223 2.1.3.2 Diagnose ..................................................... 226 2.1.3.3 Production Data .......................................... 229 2.1.4 XCVR Unit Node ......................................... 230 2.1.4.1 Power .......................................................... 230 2.1.4.2 Frequency ................................................... 232 2.1.4.3 Space Diversity ........................................... 233 2.1.4.3.1 Space Diversity Combiner Statistics ............ 236
23
B4017
InterLink 2.1.4.3.1.1 2.1.4.3.1.2 2.1.4.3.1.3 2.1.4.3.1.4 2.1.4.4 2.1.4.5 2.1.4.6 2.1.4.7 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 2.1.5.2 2.1.5.3 2.1.5.4 2.1.6 2.1.6.1 2.1.7 2.1.7.1 2.1.7.2 2.1.7.3 2.1.7.3.1 2.1.7.3.2 2.1.7.4 2.1.7.5 2.1.8 2.1.8.1 2.1.9 2.1.9.1. 2.1.9.2 2.1.9.3 2.1.9.4 2.1.9.5 2.1.9.6 2.1.10 2.1.10.1 2.1.11 2.1.11.1 2.1.12 2.1.12.1 2.1.12.2 2.1.12.3 2.1.12.4 2.1.12.5 2.1.12.6
24
Dispersion Graph ........................................ Persistent polling ......................................... Automatic logging of data ............................ Versatile graphs .......................................... DRO Tuning ................................................ Looping ....................................................... Diagnose ..................................................... Production Data .......................................... Modem Board Node .................................... Error Pulse Output ...................................... Looping ....................................................... Diagnose ..................................................... Production Data .......................................... Modem Board - Radio Port Node ................ BER Thresholds .......................................... Interface Baseband Board Node ................. Available Functions ..................................... Wayside Channel ........................................ Looping ....................................................... Main Loops ................................................. Wayside Channel Loops and PRBS Settings Diagnose ..................................................... Production Data .......................................... Interface Board - Optical Port Node ............. Laser Control .............................................. SVCE Board Node ...................................... Available Functions ..................................... 64kb/s Channels ......................................... Telephone Settings ..................................... Looping ....................................................... Diagnose ..................................................... Production Data .......................................... Transmission RX Interface Nodes ............... AIS Insert ..................................................... Transmission TX Interface Nodes ............... Path Trace .................................................. SOH Frame ................................................. System Description ..................................... DCC ............................................................ Wayside Channel ........................................ 64kb/s Channels ......................................... SVCE Telephone ........................................ SOH Selection Dialogue box .......................
237 238 238 239 240 241 243 245 246 246 247 249 249 249 249 251 251 252 253 253 255 256 256 257 257 259 260 261 263 267 268 270 271 271 273 273 275 275 277 277 278 278 279
B4017
3.0
Alarm Management ...................................................... 3.1 Alarm Data Acquisition ..................................... 3.2 Alarm Severity Levels ...................................... 3.3 Current Alarms ................................................. 3.3.1 Current Alarms View ........................................ 3.4 Historical Alarm Data ....................................... 3.4.1 NE Alarm Log Manager .................................... 3.4.2 NE Alarm Log View .......................................... 3.4.3 Database Logging ............................................ 3.5 Alarm Edit ........................................................
281 281 281 283 283 284 284 285 286 287
4.0
Performance Measurements ....................................... 289 4.1 Measurement Types ........................................ 289 4.2 Measurement Nodes ........................................ 291 4.3 Cumulative Measurements ............................... 292 4.4 Periodic Measurements (15Min, 24Hour and Month)294 4.5 Thresholds ....................................................... 295 4.6 Database Logging ............................................ 296 Analog Measurements ................................................ 297 5.1 Analog measurements ..................................... 297 5.2 RF Statistics .................................................... 298 Security Management .................................................. 6.1 User Account Administration ............................ 6.1.1 Add User .......................................................... 6.1.2 Edit User .......................................................... 6.1.3 Delete User ...................................................... 6.1.4 Change Password ........................................... 6.2 Security Event Logging .................................... 6.2.1 NE Security Log Manager ................................ 6.2.2 NE Security Log View ...................................... 6.2.3 Database Logging ............................................ 300 300 301 302 303 304 305 305 306 307
5.0
6.0
7.0
Operation...................................................................... 308 7.1 Handset ........................................................... 308
B4017
25
InterLink 8.0 Frequency setting ........................................................ 8.1 Setting of Frequency ........................................ 8.2 DRO Tuning .................................................... 8.2.1 Tx .................................................................... 8.2.2 Rx .................................................................... 310 311 312 312 314
SECTION V ........................................................... 317

1.0 Alarms and Description .............................................. 319
SECTION VI........................................................... 341

1.0 Unit Removal ................................................................ 343
SECTION VII .......................................................... 347

Appendix I Frequency Plans .................................................. 349 1.0 4 GHz .............................................................. 349 2.0 5 GHz .............................................................. 351 3.0 Lower 6 GHz .................................................... 352 4.0 Upper 6 GHz .................................................... 353 5.0 7 GHz .............................................................. 354 6.0 8 GHz .............................................................. 359 7.0 11 GHz ............................................................ 361
26
B4017
System Description
SECTION I
System Description
B4017
27
InterLink

28
B4017
System Description
1.0
Introduction
The InterLink STM-1 radio-relay equipment is designed to be used in the frequency bands from 4 to 11GHz. The equipment is all indoor mounted. Available configurations include 1+0 to 8+0 (unprotected) and 1+1 to 7+1, including Hot Stand-by (protected). Space Diversity and Co-Channel/XPIC are optionally included. Dependent on the configuration, both terminal and double terminal systems are supported. Built-in supervision system enables easy installation and configuration, and system status and availability data may be recorded. Advanced management with standardised use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC) allows for easy remote access to the equipment. The equipment specifications are in accordance with relevant international standards issued by ITU, ETSI and IEC. Key features Compact, flexible and makes installation easy ETSI and 19 mounting Terminals and double terminals (configuration dependant) Flexible terminal layouts makes mounting of two terminals in one main rack possible Prepared for future expansion Unprotected systems: 1+0 to 8+0 Protected systems: 1+1 to 7+1, including Hot Stand-by (HSB) Space Diversity operation Co-Channel/XPIC operation ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarisation), ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polarisation) and CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarised) operational modes 28, 29, 29.65 and 40 MHz channel arrangements Low power consumption High system gain Transceivers as plug-in units Automatic/Manual Transmitter Power Control (ATPC/MTPC) Modem Board supporting both 64TCM and 128TCM modulation Electrical and optical STM-1 interfaces 2 Mb/s (E1) wayside channels Service Channel / Engineering OrderWire, including PABX 64 kb/s insert channels
B4017
29
InterLink
Built in diagnostics with local and remote loopback Standardised use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC) SNMP via NEW-NMS, and OSPF Interface for local and sub-network management (LAN)
2.0
System Overview
This chapter gives an overview of the different system configurations supported by the InterLink radio-relay equipment, and describes the layout of the various configurations.
2.1 2.1.1
System Configurations Definitions and terms used

The following definitions and terms are used: N+0 systems: N+1 systems: Unprotected systems consisting of N (1 N 8) parallel and equivalent radio channels. Protected systems consisting of N (1 N 7) parallel and equivalent radio channels, all protected by a common protection channel (+1). The access to and use of the protection channel is controlled by an integrated Radio Protection System (RPS). N+1 systems can also be equipped with additional Interface Baseband Boards in order to use the protection channel for Low Priority Traffic (LPT).
Hot Stand-by (HSB): Protected system consisting of 2 transceivers, both enabled for using the same RF-channel. The transmitter which actually transmits, is selected by a RF-switch located between the transmitter and the RF-channel filter. At the receive side, both receivers are fed with an identical signal from a RF-splitter located between the RF-channel filter and the receivers. Baseband switching is performed identically to an ordinary 1+1 system. HSBDual
Baseband
As ordinary Hot Stand-by, but with an additional Interface Baseband Board, excluding baseband Txsplitting and Rx-switching.
B4017
30
System Description
Double-Terminal : Terminal serving 2 antenna directions by utilizing common Connection Panel, SVCE Board (optional) and Supervisory Board for both directions. Double-Terminals are only defined for single polarisation systems.
2.1.2
Modes of operation
The InterLink radio-relay equipment support ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarisation), ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polarisation) and CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarised) operational modes.
2.1.3
Available system configurations

The following table defines all available system configurations. Dark shaded squares indicate impossible or non-supported configurations. The figures indicate the number of subracks needed to build the actual system configuration.
&RQILJXUDWLRQV
1+0 1+1 HSB HSBDual Baseband 2+0 2+1 3+0 3+1 4+0 4+1 5+0 5+1 6+0 6+1 7+0 7+1 8+0
7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 3RO 3ROV

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1
&&'3 ;3,&
1
'RXEOH7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 &&'3 3RO 3ROV ;3,&

1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
/HJHQG
1 = 1 subrack 2 = 2 subracks 3 = 3 subracks
Table 2.1.3.1 Available system configurations
B4017
31
InterLink 2.2 2.2.1 System Layouts Definitions and terms used

The following definitions and terms are used: Main rack: ETSI or 19 rack (220 cm height, 60 cm width and 30 cm depth) which is used for the construction of terminals and double-terminals. Basic system building block. Several variants are used for building the different system configurations.
Subrack:
Smaller Systems (SS): Systems containing 2 transceivers, all built into one, single subrack. Larger Systems (LS): Systems containing > 2 transceivers (maximum 8), built by using 2 or 3 subracks. Auxiliary Subrack: Subrack in a predefined position in the top of the main rack (see Figure 2.2.2.1), containing Power Filtering Boards for separate power supplies to each transceiver. The Auxiliary Subrack is optional for Smaller Systems and Larger Systems containing 4 transceivers. For Larger Systems containing > 4 transceivers, the Auxiliary Subrack is by default included. Standard subrack in a predefined position as the upper subrack in the main rack (see Figure 2.2.2.1). Standard subrack in a predefined position as the middle subrack in the main rack (see Figure 2.2.2.1). Standard subrack in a predefined position as the lower subrack in the main rack (see Figure 2.2.2.1).
Subrack A:
Subrack B:
Subrack C:
32
B4017
System Description 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Main racks ETSI and 19 variants

All available system configurations are by default to be mounted in ETSIracks. 19 mounting is also supported by removing the adaptors on each side of the different subracks. Nera offers an adaptor kit which transforms a standard Nera ETSI-rack into a 19-rack. Smaller Systems, which consist of one subrack only, can be (optionally) mounted freestanding. Neras standard ETSI-rack and corresponding 19-rack variant are shown in the figures below. Note that the ETSI- and 19-rack have slightly different placing of the subracks due to the different standardized mounting modules. Other rack heights can be used (optional / customers special requirements). Auxiliary Subrack, Subrack A, Subrack B and Subrack C are all predefined mounting positions in the main racks.
$X[6XEUDFN
$X[6XEUDFN
6XEUDFN$
6XEUDFN$
6XEUDFN%
6XEUDFN%
6XEUDFN&
6XEUDFN&
Fig. 2.2.2.1 Nera ETSI-rack (left) and corresponding 19-rack variant (right)
B4017
33
InterLink 2.2.2.2 Waveguide runs

The waveguide runs are mounted in the left and, if required, in the right side of the main rack. Maximum 2 waveguide runs, 1 Main and 1 Space Diversity waveguide run, can be mounted in each side. This restriction limits the system configurations which can be combined in a main rack. Note that the mounting of waveguide runs to the main rack sides is supported for Nera main racks only. Installation in non-Nera main racks may require special fitting materials. The figures below show the waveguide runs for a 2 times 1+1 terminal system (the main rack sides are shown as "foldout", and the placing of the waveguide runs seen in top-view.
6\VWHPOD\RXW
O D Q LR W S R N F D U E X 6 [ X $
'LU
0DLQ
U D H U
6'
W Q R U I
%UDQFKLQJZLWKRXWILOWHU DQG:*OD\RXWW\SLFDO
'LU
W Q R U I
6'
0DLQ
U D H U
PWR ON
PWR ON
PWR ON
PWR ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
&K3 &K
$ N F D U E X 6
W ARNING W ARNING POWER POWER
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
PUT N I OUTPUT
NPUT I OUTPUT
NPUT I UTPUT O
NPUT I OUTP UT
NPUT I OUTPUT
NP I UT OUTPUT
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPU I T OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTP UT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
PUT N I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
'LU 'LU
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
3 K &
$/0 3:5
K &
$/0 3:5
K &
$/0 3:5 $/0 3:5 $/0 3:5
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
SUPERVISO RY BD
SVCE BD
INTERFACE BASEBAND BD
M ODEM BD
M ODEM BD
PWR ON
OFF
U L '
U L '
U L '
TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3 IC1

GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
GND
GND +
- GND +
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
C D
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
NPUT I OUT PUT
NPUT I OUTPUT
PUT N I OUTPUT
NPU I T OUTPUT
NPUT I UTPUT O
NPUT I OUT PUT
NPUT I OUTPUT
&K &K3
W ARNING POWER W ARNI NG POWER
% N F D U E X 6
INTFC C
NPUT I OUT PUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPU T
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NP I UT OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUT PUT
INTFC C
NPUT I OUTPUT
3 K &
$/0 3:5
K &
$/0 3:5
K &
$/0 3:5 $/0 3:5 $/0 3:5
PWR ON OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
'LU 'LU
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
SUPERV ISORY BD
SV CE BD
M ODEM BD
M ODEM BD
PWR ON
OFF
U L '
U L '
U L '

GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ - GND +
GND +
GND
& N F D U E X 6
U D H U
W Q R U I
W Q R U I
U D H U
Note 1: Note 2:
Covers for Auxiliary Subrack (optional), baseband part of Subracks A and B and open parts of the main rack are omitted Waveguide R84 used in the drawing
Figure 2.2.2.2.1 An example of the placing of waveguide runs 34

B4017
System Description
:*0DLQ SRO+9'LU :*6' SRO+9'LU
:*0DLQ SRO9+'LU :*6' SRO9+'LU
(76,RUPDLQUDFN )URQW
Fig. 2.2.2.2.2 Placing of the waveguide runs seen in top-view
2.2.3
Subracks - Smaller Systems

The following subrack variants are used for building Smaller Systems: Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version The combined transceiver and baseband subrack includes all units required for a Smaller System. Note that a standard version can be combined with a reversed version enabling 2 Smaller Systems terminals to be mounted in the same ETSI or 19 main rack. The different subrack variants for Smaller Systems are described in the following subchapters.
2.2.3.1
Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version

The standard version has the transceivers, including waveguide port(s) (Main and additionally Space Diver-sity), mounted to the left, and the baseband parts mounted to the right. Channels are by default numbered from the left to the right (i.e. ChP/Ch1 to the left and Ch1/Ch2 to the right). Figure 2.2.3.1 shows a 1+1 terminal (the cover in front of the baseband parts is omitted).
B4017
35
InterLink
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
C D
3 2 1
&K3 &K
W AR NING POWER W ARN ING POWER
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
3 K K K & & &

PWR ON O FF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
S VCE BD SUPERVISOR Y BD INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD MODEM BD
GND
PWR ON
O FF
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER POWER POWER CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3 TB2 IC1
+ GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT (EXT CON) CON) J1
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
Fig. 2.2.3.1 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version
2.2.3.2
Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version

The reversed version has the transceivers, including waveguide port(s), mounted to the right, and the baseband parts mounted to the left. Channels are by default numbered from the right to the left (i.e. ChP/Ch1 to the right and Ch1/Ch2 to the left). Figure 2.2.3.2 shows a 1+1 terminal (the cover in front of the baseband parts is omitted).
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
C D
C D
3 2 1
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
&K &K3
W ARNING W ARNING POWER POWER
3 K K K & & &

PWR ON O FF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
SVCE BD SUPERVISORY B D INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD MODEM BD
GND
TRANSCEIVER
PWR ON
O FF
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER POWER POWER CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS TB2 TB2 TB3 TB3 IC1
+ GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
- GND + -
GND
Fig. 2.2.3.2 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version
2.2.3.3
Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version

The split version has one transceiver and corresponding waveguide port(s) to the left, one transceiver and corresponding waveguide port(s) to the right and the baseband parts in the middle. This version is used for systems utilising 1 channel in horizontal and 1 channel in vertical polarisation in the same antenna direction (terminal), or for systems utilising 1 channel in each antenna direction (double-terminal). Figure 2.2.3.3 shows a 1+0 double-terminal (the cover in front of the baseband parts is omitted).
36
B4017
System Description
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
IN TFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
&K
W ARNING POW ER
I N TFC B
IN TFC B
IN TFC B
IN TFC B
IN TFC B
I N TFC B
I N TFC B
IN PU T OU TPUT
IN PU T OU TPUT
IN PU T OU T PU T
INPUT OUT PU T
IN PU T OU TPUT
INPUT OU T PU T
INPUT OUT PU T
&K
W ARNIN G PO W ER
PW R ON
$/0 3 :5
I N TFC C
IN TFC C
I N TFC C
IN TFC C
IN TFC C
I N TFC C
IN TFC C
IN PU T OU TPUT
IN PU T OU T PU T
IN PU T OUT PU T
IN PU T OU TPUT
INPUT OU T PU T
INPUT OUT PU T
IN PU T OU TPUT
'LU
TRANSCEIVER
K &
$ /0 3: 5 3:5
K &
$/ 0 3: 5
K &
$/0 $ /0 3: 5
K &
$/ 0 3:5
OF F
50 9 5 67
509 5 67
5 09 567
50 9 5 67
509 56 7
5 09 56 7
'LU
TRANSCEIVER
SUPER VISORY BD
SVCE BD
MODEM BD
Fig. 2.2.3.3 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version
MODEM BD
PW R ON
OF F
LU '
LU '
LU '
LU '
TRANSCEIVERPOWERC ONNECTIONS TB2 TB3

GN D
IC1
+
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT C ON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
GN D
GN D +
G ND
2.2.3.4
Layout of Smaller Systems 1 subrack systems

The following table shows the layouts of Smaller Systems, i.e. 1 subrack systems, in main racks.
N F D Q U LR E V X U 6 H V Q G Y H LR W Q G U L D E D G LV U P Q 3 R D OD & W ' , & V R S 3 & &;

Q R L W D U X J L I Q R &
1+0 1+0 1+0 1+1 1+1 1+1 1+1 HSB HSB HSB
Dual BB
OD LQ P U H 7

OD LQ P U H 7 OH E X R '
3 & & $ 3 $ & $

Q LR W D V LU OD R S
3 & & $ 3 $ & $
N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H Y H G H LQ E V U H P Y R &H U
N F D U E X 6 G Q LR V H U LQ E H Y P OLW R &S V
N F D U E X 6 U H Y L H F V Q D U 7
N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H Y H G H LQ E V U H P Y R &H U
N F D U E X 6 G Q D E H V D %
6&
6XEUDFN$
6XEUDFN%
$X[6XEUDFN

O D Q LR W S 2
\ U R W D G Q D 0
1 1 1 1
V H W R 1
2+0 2+0 2+0 2+0
1 1 1 1 1 1
Note 1: combinations are used to build two terminals in one main rack Table 2.2.3.4 Layout of Smaller Systems 1 subrack systems
B4017
37
InterLink 2.2.4 Subracks - Larger Systems

The following subrack variants are used for building Larger Systems: Transceiver subrack Baseband subrack Baseband subrack - 3 channel systems Auxiliary subrack (optional for Larger Systems containing 4 transceivers, included in Larger Systems containing > 4 transceivers)
Combinations of transceiver and baseband subracks makes the Larger Systems. Larger Systems require 2 or 3 subrack positions in the main rack and are in principle not able to be combined with Smaller Systems. The different subrack variants for Larger Systems are described in the following subchapters.
2.2.4.1
Transceiver subrack
A transceiver subrack includes 1 - 4 transceivers. The waveguide port(s) can be to the left, to the right or both to the left and to the right (split branching for serving two polarisations or two antenna directions). Transceiver subracks are mounted in Subrack A position (2 subrack systems) or in Subrack A and Subrack C positions (3 subrack systems). Figure 2.2.4.1 shows a 3+1 split-branching/dual-polarisation terminal transceiver subrack.
WARNING POWER
&K3 &K &K &K +9 +9 9+ 9+

WARNING POWER WARNING POWER WARNING POWER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 2.2.4.1 Transceiver subrack
38
B4017
System Description 2.2.4.2 Baseband subrack

A baseband subrack includes all the baseband units (equal to the baseband part of a combined subrack). Figure 2.2.4.2 shows the baseband subrack for a 3+1 terminal (the front cover is omitted).
21
INTFC A
20
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
18
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
16
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
C D
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
Fig. 2.2.4.2 Baseband subrack
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
AUXILIARY SERVICE BD
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3
- GND + GND
PWR ON
OFF
S1 IC1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
2.2.4.3
Baseband subrack - 3 channel systems

A baseband subrack for 3 channel systems is functionally identical to an ordinary baseband subrack; the difference is that the Connection Panel Larger Systems is replaced by the Connection Panel Smaller Systems. The empty part to the left is covered by 2 transceiver position blind flanges. Figure 2.2.4.3 shows the baseband subrack for a 2+1 terminal (the front cover for the baseband part is omitted).
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A B
A B
C D
C D
3 2 1
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
SUPERVISORY BD
SVCE BD
Fig. 2.2.4.3 Baseband subrack for 3 channel systems
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3

- GND + GND
MODEM BD
+
PWR ON
OFF
S1 IC1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT (EXT CON) CON) J1
J2 (SU TEST)
- GND + -
GND
B4017
39
InterLink 2.2.4.4 Auxiliary subrack

An auxiliary subrack includes Power Filtering Boards for separate power supplies and filtering to each transceiver. The auxiliary subrack is mandatory for systems consisting of more than 4 transceivers. Other-wise, the auxiliary subrack is optional. Figure 2.2.4.4 shows the auxiliary subrack for an 8 channel system (the front cover is omitted).
P WR ON
PW R ON
PWR ON
P WR ON
PWR ON
PWR ON
P WR ON
PW R ON
OF F
O FF
OF F
OF F
OF F
O FF
OF F
O FF
Fig. 2.2.4.4 Auxiliary subrack
2.2.4.5
Layout of Larger Systems - 2 subrack systems

The following table shows the layouts of Larger Systems, i.e. 2 subrack systems, in main racks.
OD LQ P U H 7 OH E X R '

Q R L W D U X LJ I Q R &
1+1 HSB HSBDual BB 2+0 2+1 2+1 2+1 3+0 3+0 3+0 3+1 3+1 3+1 4+0 4+0 4+0
OD LQ P U H 7
3 & & $ 3 $ & $

Q LR W D V LU OD R S
3 & & $ 3 $ & $
V Q LR W D LV U OD R S
3 ' & &
N F D Q U LR E V X 6 H G U H Y Q U LE G D G P Q R D & W , & V 3 ;
N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H H Y Q H LE G V U H P Y R &H U
N F D U E X 6 G Q V H LR Q LE U H Y W P OL R &S V

N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H H Y Q H LE G V U H P Y R &H U

6&
6XEUDFN$
6XEUDFN%
$X[6XEUDFN

O D Q LR W S 2
\ U R W D G Q D 0
V H W R 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
Note 2:
Can optionally be delivered with the baseband subrack for 3 channel systems
Table 2.2.4.5 Layout of Larger Systems 2 subrack systems
40
B4017
System Description 2.2.4.6 Layout of Larger Systems 3 subrack systems

The following table shows the layouts of Larger Systems, i.e. 3 subrack systems, in main racks.
OD Q L P U H 7 H OE X R '

Q LR W D U X LJ I Q R &
2+1 3+0 3+1 4+0 4+1 4+1 5+0 5+0 5+1 5+1 6+0 6+0 6+1 6+1 7+0 7+0 7+1 7+1 8+0 8+0
OD Q L P U H 7
3 & & $ 3 $ & $

Q R L W D LV U D O R S
3 & & $ 3 $ & $
V Q R L W D LV U D OR S
3 ' & &
N F Q D U R L E V X U H 6 G Y G H Q LE U D PG Q R D & W , & V 3 ;
N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H Y H Q H LE G V U PH Y R H &U
N F D U E X Q 6 G R L V H Q LE U H Y L PW OS R &V

N F D U E X 6 U H LY H F V Q D U 7
N F D Q U E LR V X U 6 G H Y H Q H LE G V U PH Y R H &U


N F D U E X 6 U H LY H F V Q D U 7
6&
6XEUDFN$
6XEUDFN%
$X[6XEUDFN

OD Q LR W S 2
\ U R W D G Q D 0
V H W R 1
Table 2.2.4.6 Layout of Larger Systems 3 subrack systems
B4017
41
InterLink
Fig. 2-1 Rack mounted equipment (1+1 terminal) 42
Fig. 2-2 Rack mounted equipment (3+1 terminal)

B4017
System Description
Fig. 2-3 Subrack-layout for a 1+1 terminal

B4017
43
InterLink External Connectors
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM BD
GND
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER POWER POWER CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS TB2 TB2 TB3 IC1
+ GND
Plug-in Units Transceivers External Connectors
Fig. 2-4 Subrack-layout for a 1+1 terminal, Front Cover removed 44

B4017
MODEM BD
+
PWR ON
OFF
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
Power filter
System Description
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
21
INTFC A
20
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
18
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
16
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
C D
C D
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT O UTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
PWR ON
OFF

- GND + GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
- GND + - GND +
Fig. 2-5 Subrack-layout for a 3+1 terminal

B4017
SUB RACK 2
45
SUB RACK 1
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
InterLink
3.0
3.1
Unit Descriptions
Modem Board
46
B4017
System Description
8x19.44 Mb/s Data, Clock and Sync. (x4)
TCM Modulator
SOH Processing
Frequency Multiplexer
BUS selection Tx
8x19.44 Mb/s Data, Clock and Sync.
4x38.88 Mb/s Data, Clock
350 MHz
Tx=350 MHz
IF
Rx=140 MHz
8x19.44 Mb/s Data, Clock and Sync. (x4)
BUS selection Rx
8x19.44 Mb/s Data, Clock and Sync.
4x38.88 Mb/s Data, Clock
TCM Demodulator
140 MHz
DC supply voltages
Control & Detector Signals
DC/DC Converters
ACF
Modem/Transceiver comm. Interface
MT com.
48 VDC
The Modem Board has the following main functions: TCM modulator TCM demodulator Alarm and Configuration Function (ACF) Modem/ Transceiver Communication (MTCOM) SOH processing of the incoming and outgoing STM1 data Multiplexing of incomingand outgoing STM-1 data Power supply Modulator: Inserting SOH data and scrambling. Mapping the STM1 data according to a Trellis coding schema. Spectrum shaping by FIR-filtering. Modulation of the 350 MHz carrier with a TCM signal. Demodulator: Demodulation of the 140 MHz, TCM signal. Carrier- and clock- regeneration. Slope equalising and channel filtering Adaptive transversal filtering Cross polarisation cancelling of co-channel. (Optional). Decoding of the Trellis coded signal Descrambling and accessing the SOH in the STM-1 frame. ACF: ASIC configuration and management. Monitoring of alarms and internal status. Control of analogue functions. Assisting in testing of modem functionality at factory MTCOM: To enable the ACF to communicate with the tansceiver DC supply: To convert the 48V battery voltage to +5V and +3.3V
B4017
47
InterLink 3.2 Interface Baseband Board
48
B4017
System Description
75 ohm
155Mb/s Interface
Overhead Radio Processor
2 Mb/s Interface
120 ohm bal
Alarm and Control function

Board reset switch
TEMP SENSORS
SOH bus DCC channels
Alarm LED (red) Power LED (green)
Inventory Data
The Interface Baseband Board has the following main functions: Main customer traffic interfaces in the InterLink radio relay system. Customer traffic connected trough the connection panel. Customer interfaces on the board are 155Mb/s traffic and 2Mb/s wayside traffic. Both interfaces comply with ITU-T rec. G.703. DCC channels in the 155Mb/s overhead traffic may be extracted/ inserted on the IBB via the SU Board. The DCC-data rates are 64kb/s, 192kb/s or 576kb/s. 64kb/s traffic may be inserted/extracted in the 155Mb/s overhead via the SVCE Board. The SOH bus carries the 64kb/s traffic between the SVCE board and the IBB board. Alarm and Control Function (ACF) is a local part of the InterLink supervisory system. The ACF provides control, configuration and status information collection on the IBB.
B4017
to / from Modem
49
InterLink 3.3 SVCE Board
50
B4017
System Description
PABX Connection
3$%;$'$37(5
-48V
Temperatures Voltages Alarms Inventory data
Other Equipment 1 Other Equipment 2

Engineering Order Wire
'&'&
+3.3V +5.0V +12.0V -12.0V
Int. Teleph. No. Ext. Teleph. No. -5.0V PABX No. Timeslot SVCE Ch. Timeslot Ch1 Timeslot Ch2 Timeslot Ch3 Timeslot Ch4 Analog levels setting G.703 Co/Contra
5(* 6(59,&( &+$11(/

Ch1 G.703 Ch2 Ch3 V.11 G.703
4-Wire Call Inp/Outp Controll Inp/Outp E/M-Wire Internal Telephone External Telephone Loudspeaker
$&)
Ch4 V.11
NEV NEV $'$37(5 $'$37(5
08;SDUWRI$&)
RESET DEVELOP PORT
COMMON_SOH_BUS
4 INTF_SOH_BUSES
TO/FROM SU
UNIT POS ADDRESS
The SVCE Board has the following main functions:

Service Channel Party line telephone interface One telephone located on the shelf and one located in max. 1000m distance. Separate two digits (00...99) call no. for each telephone and collective call by pressing *button. Loudspeaker output with switch and without volume control is provided. Loudspeaker is switched off by pushing #-button. Analog interfaces to connect other service channel equipment. E/M-wire and Control signal for PABX-Adapter and Loudspeaker will only be transmitted over the radio hop if timeslot corresponding to SOH-byte E1, E2 or F1 is used.
Provides connection between the party line and the Public Switched Telephone Network. Max. eight Adapters can be addressed within a network (call no. #1... #8) When an incoming call is detected in the adapter, a collective call will be sent to the party line For an outgoing call, dial the adapters no. and wait for the dialling tone.
64kb/s Adapter and the first lifted handset will start the control signal and the line will be connected.
PABX-Adapter
Two Adapters each with one channel acc. to ITU-T rec. G.703 where Co- or Contra The channels from each Adapter can be routed to/from five selectable SOH-Buses
(separate routing for Rx and Tx). ACF (Alarm and Configuration Function) the board. directionalinterfacecanbeselectedandonechannelacc.toITU-TrecV.11withbytetiming.
Collectstemperaturesfromtwosensors,secondaryvoltages,alarmsandinventorydatafrom Configure the board by setting telephone and PABX numbers, timeslots, adapt levels for all
analog inp/outp, G.703 co- or contra-interface and selects buses where 64kb/s channels are to be transmitted.
B4017
51
InterLink 3.4 Supervisory Board
52
B4017
System Description
NI TP LCT
DCC Busses
Supervisory Function
I2C
RPS Function
Internal Busses Regular SOH DIR2 Protection Regular
SOH Interface
Protection
SOH DIR1
683(59,625<%2$5'
The Supervisory Unit Board has the following main functions: System supervision and information collection Information from other network elements Alarms from local units Status from local units System Control Radio Protection Switching (RPS) HW configuration of local units SW configuration of local units Communication ports for Network Element Management interface implementation Ethernet, Twisted Pair (TP) RS-485, Network Interface (NI) x 2 RS-232, Local Craft Terminal (LCT) x 2 Element Management over radio, Data Communication Channel (DCC) x 2
B4017
53
InterLink 3.5 Auxiliary Services Board
54
B4017
System Description
Alarm Inputs Analogue Inputs Relay Lines
40 Alarm Inputs
8 Ch. ADC
8 Relays
Internal Busses
ACF Alarm and Configuration Function
$8;,/,$5<6(59,&(6%2$5'
The Auxiliary Services Board has the following main functions: Alarm and Configuration Function Customer Interface 40 Alarm Inputs (80 separate lines) 8 Relays (16 separate lines) 8 Analogue Inputs (8 separate lines and 2 GND lines)
B4017
55
InterLink 3.6 Power Filters
Power Filter Upper
Power Filter Lower 56

B4017
System Description
212))VZLWFK %DWWHU\ FRQQHFWLRQ ,QSXWDODUP FLUFXLW 1/UDFN )URPWKHRWKHU ILOWHUERDUGV
9'5
)LOWHU

6RIWVWDUW
6ZLWFKLQGLFDWRU FRQWDFWV 7RWKHRWKHU ILOWHUERDUGV 6XSHUYLVRU\DQG LYHQWRU\FLUFXLWV ZLWK,&EXV
The Power Filtering Board has the following main functions: Prevent external noise from disturbing the equipment. Prevent that noise generated by the equipment finds its way to the battery connections. Provide immunity against voltage transients. Support for parallel mounting through blocking diodes. Perform the (automatic) fuse function for the complete terminal. Perform the on/off function by a circuit breaker integrated with the automatic fuse. Softstart function to limit inrush current. Support for both positive and negative battery pole grounding. Relay outputs (available at the connection panel) for circuit breaker position indication. Inventory control, temperature monitoring and alarm collection.
B4017
57
InterLink 3.7 Alarm Display & Relay Board
58
B4017
System Description
O D F LL W U &
5HOD\V
G H U
+BAT_COMMON
G H U H J Q D U R Q H H U J
U U R MR D LQ 00
'ULYHUV 'ULYHUV IRU 5HOD\V ,& ,2$
J LQ Q U D :
3RZHU 2Q
IRU /('V
,& ,2$
,& 7(03
/&7
,& $' ,& ((3520
adr=4
3&%
'&'& 9 &RQYHUWHU !9
The Alarm Display & Relay Board has the following main functions: Connection service port for a LCT. LEDs for the main alarms Critical and Major/Minor, for the indicator Warning and for Power On. Relays and relays outputs (available at the connection panel) for the main alarms Critical and Major/-Minor, and for the indicator Warning . Inventory control, temperature monitoring, voltage reading and alarm collection.
B4017
59
InterLink 3.8 Optical Interface BB Boards
Single Mode
Multi Mode
60
B4017
System Description
The Optical Interface Boards have the following main functions: Main customer traffic interfaces in the InterLink radio relay system. The only difference between the -F3 and -F4 versions is the optical transceiver. Customer traffic of the boards is 155 Mb/s optical and 2Mb/s electrical wayside. Customer fibre cables are inserted directly into the optical transceiver on the board front, while the 2Mb/s interface is located on the connection panel. 2NCS590A-F3 has a single mode 155 Mb/s customer interface with a target distance of 15 km. The -F3 version is compliant with ITU-T G.957 and G.958 recommendations. The 2NCS590A-F4 version has a 155 Mb/s customer interfaces with a target distance of 2 km. The -F4 version is compliant with ANSI Rec. T1.105.06 and T1.646. DCC channels in the frame overhead may be extracted/inserted on the OIBB via the supervisory board. The DCC-data rates are 64kb/s, 192kb/s or 576kb/s. 64kb/s traffic may be inserted/extracted in the 155Mb/s frame overhead via the service board. Up to four 64kb/s may be inserted/extracted on each service board. The SOH bus carries the 64kb/s traffic between the service board and the OIBB. Alarm and Control Function (ACF) is a local part of the InterLink supervisory system. The ACF provides control, configuration and status information collection of the OIBB.
B4017
61
InterLink 3.9 Transceiver
62
B4017
System Description
;0750RGXOH 0+]
7[,) 0+] 5[,) 0+] 07FRP
$*&&DEOH HTXDOL]HU
3UHGLVWRUWLRQ $*&
66% 8SFRQYHUWHU
3RZHU $PSOLILHU /2,0'P[U
5)RXW
0XOWL SOH[HU
0+]
,)ORRS 6\QWKHVL]HU8QLW ,) 6\QW 7[ 6\QW 5[ 6\QW 7[/2
0+]
07 &RP
9
&75/
0+]
5[/2
,0' 'HW
/2 'HW
'&'& )/75 $*&

,)&75/%G
0+]
'6% 0L[HU
)/75 $*&
0+]
,05 0L[HU
5&950RGXOH
/RZ1RLVH $PSOLILHU
5)LQ
The standard transceiver unit contains 7 modules/sub-units; a microwave transmitter module, a receiver module, 3 local oscillators, an IF & controller board and a detector board. In transceivers for space diversity systems, the detector board is replaced by a space diversity combiner board and an additional delay board the transceiver is connected to the modem with a single coaxial cable that carries Tx-IF, Rx-IF and signalling (MTcom). Power is supplied through a separate connector. The transceiver utilises a single conversion scheme in the transmitter and a dual conversion in the receiver. In order to obtain an optimum spectrum mask, the transmitter chain contains predistortion circuitry at IF before the microwave upconverter and power amplifier. Narrow channel filters in the branching unit further reduces the spectrum mask. The second converter in the receive chain allows for an IF loop-back facility for diagnostics purposes. LO frequencies for the microwave frequency converters are generated in synthesised DROs. The oscillators are by nature fixed in frequency, i.e. they can only be remotely programmed within a narrow range. When necessary, the oscillators can be mechanically adjusted within a range of approx. 200 MHz. Power supply, transmit/receive IFchain and controller (MPC/DSP) for the transceiver are integrated on the IF & controller board. The space diversity transceiver contains a dual microwave receiver (one for each antenna), and combination circuitry at IF. It can either combine the two received signals, or select between them. The branching unit contains narrow RF channel filters and circulators.
B4017
63
InterLink

64
B4017
Installation
SECTION II
Installation
B4017
65
InterLink

66
B4017
Installation
1.0
Basic Planning
'$QWHQQD
'(OOLSWLFDO:*5)6
RU
'(OOLSWLFDO:*$QGUHZ
'5HFWDQJXODU:*1HUD
5DGLR7UDQVPLVVLRQ &RQQHFWLRQV
'
5DFN3RZHU &RQQHFWLRQV
,QWHU/LQN 1/
7UDIILF1HWZRUN &RQQHFWLRQV
$(TXLSPHQW5DFN
&
$FFHVVRULHV
%(OHFWULFDO,QWHUIDFH670
$5DFN0RXQWLQJ
%:D\VLGH,QWHUIDFH
$'&&DEOHVDQG *URXQGLQJ &%DVLF6HUYLFH.LW
%2SWLFDO,QWHUIDFH670
%7HUPLQDOWR7HUPLQDO
&([WQG6HUYLFH.LW
%6HUYFK$ODUP1,
&([WHQVLRQ%RDUG
%/&7/$1,QWHUIDFH
B4017
67
InterLink 1.1
Item A1 A2-1 A2-2 A3-1 A3-2 A3-3 Note Note Note Note Note Note
Installation Material
RACK SUPPORT & DC CABLING & GROUNDING - Common for all InterLink Description Information Code QTY Reference Equipment Rack ETSI, Height 2200 ABW131 1 Note 1 Screw Kit with Brackets Rack installation, top support and fixing to floor MSK5371 1 Note 2 Support Bar Rack top support / frame MJK46 x Note 3 DC Cable & Grounding Kit, DC power to Main rack: Terminal Block and Aux AWZP35 1 Note 4 10A fuse Power Panel. Grounding cable from rack to earth-bus. Power Cable, 10A fuse DC power to Sub-rack (max 2 XCVR) UWMK5051 (x) Note 5 Power Cable, 16A fuse DC power to Sub-rack, without Aux. Power Panel. 87W5116-1500 (2) Note 6 1 The rack is assembled with pre-mounted sub-racks and waveguide according to the actual system configuration. Optional rack for ancillary equipment is flat-packed and includes assembling instructions: drawing V2102608. 2 Contains material for mounting of 1 rack to wall / support bar or support frame. 3 Qty 1= Along wall. Qty 2 = Spaced from wall with spacer frame. Screws and brackets included in item A2-1. (L= 225 cm) 4 Standard. 25m DC cable supplied in kit. BB power = 2 cables, XCVR power = 1 cable per RF channel (n). (Calculation example (3+1 system = 4 channels): 25m cable divided by [2 + n] = 4m cable distance between radio and DC distribution. 6m Grounding cable (rack external) and terminals are included in kit. 5 Pre-attached connector in one end, 15 m. Separate grounding cable required, 10 mm, 85W37-10E04. 6 Only for dual supply to BB sub-rack feeding 3 or 4 transceivers when Aux. Power Panel is not used. Length 15 m. Pre-attached connector in one end. Separate grounding cable required, 10 mm, 85W37-10E04.
A. Rack & Power Connections
B. Traffic & Network Connections

Item B1 1 B2 1 2 B3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B5 1 2 3 B6 1 2 INTERCONNECTIONS CABLING (Common parts all InterLink) Description Information Electrical Interface, STM-1 Coax Cable, 75 Ohms Connector type 1.0/2.3 attached in one end, 10 m 2 cables per traffic-channel Wayside Interface Pair Cable, 120 Ohms Pair Cable, 120 Ohms 5 m length. Pre-attached connector, at radio side 15 m length. Pre-attached connector, at radio side Code UWMH3080 QTY (2) Reference
87W5113-500 87W5113-1500
(1) (1)
Optical Interface Single Modus SM (ITU-T Rec.). 1 duplex cable per traffic channel Fibre Patch Cord SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to LC Fibre Patch Cord SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to FC Fibre Patch Cord SM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors LC to SC Multi Modus MM (ANSI Rec.). 1 duplex cable per traffic channel Fibre Patch Cord MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to MT-RJ Fibre Patch Cord MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to FC Fibre Patch Cord MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to SC Fibre Patch Cord MM L=10m, Duplex, Connectors MT-RJ to ST Through connections - Terminal to Terminal Coax Cable, 155 Mb/s 2 cables per traffic-channel, L=4m Fibre Patch Cord, SM 1 duplex cable per traffic channel, L=5m Fibre Patch Cord, MM 1 duplex cable per traffic channel, L=5m Pair Cable, Wayside Wayside traffic between 2 terminals, L=4m Pair Cable, SVCE Service telephone between 2 terminals, L=4m Pair Cable, 64kb/s 64kb/s channels between 2 terminals, L=4m Pair Cable, NI Network Interface between 2 terminals, L=4m
87W5104-LC10 87W5104-FC10 87W5104-SC10 87W5105-MTRJ10 87W5105-FC10 87W5105-SC10 87W5105-ST10 UWMH5615-400 87W5104-LC05 87W5105-MTRJ05 87W5115-400 87W5115-400 87W5115-400 UWMK5614-400
(1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1)
Pair Cable Connections to IDF ( Service Channels Network Interface Alarms) Cable, 15 Pairs, 5 m 64Kb/s channels to IDF 87W5107-500 Service Telephone to IDF 87W5107-500 External Alarms / Remote Control to IDF 87W5107-500 Cable, 15 Pairs, 15 m 64Kb/s channels to IDF 87W5107-1500 Service Telephone to IDF 87W5107-1500 External Alarms / Remote Control to IDF 87W5107-1500 Cable, 4 Pairs, 10 m Network Interface to IDF UWMK3078 LCT / LAN Interface LCT Cable Assembly, 3m Connectors D-sub 9pins female UWMK3123 LAN Cable Assembly, 10m Standard Ethernet cable w/ RJ45-8pin connectors KMTP10
(x) (x) (x) (x) (x)
68
B4017
Installation
C. Accessories
Item Description C1 C2 C3 Basic Service Kit Extended Service Kit For InterLink Extension Board Information SERVICE KITS Code QTY 1 (x) (x) Reference
For operation and simple maintenance of InterLink. The kit contains anti-static wrist strap, AZB139-BASIC basic tools and fuses. Minimum one kit per site. For commissioning and maintenance. The kit contains special test cables, connector adapters, AZB139-EXTND fuses and special tools. (2 per system section) For advanced service only (Maintenance centre) UWF29
WAVEGUIDE - Frequency dependent parts RADIO Frequency D1 - Rectangular Waveguide D2 - Elliptical Waveguide (WG flange) GHz NERA RFS WG / Flange Type of WG (Flange) Connector See Note 1 NL2004 3.6-4.2 PDR40 E 38 J (PDR40) 15310909 (PDR40) NL2005 4.4-5.0 PDR48 E 46 J (PDR48) 15316301 (PDR48) ES 46 J (PDR48) 15333101 NL2006A 5.9-6.4 E 60 J (PDR70) 15325101 (PDR70) NL2006B 6.4-7.1 PDR70 E 65 J (PDR70) 15375103 (PDR70) NL2007 7.1-7.7 PDR70 * E 70 J (PDR70)** 15335211 (PDR84) E 78 J (PDR70)** 15342301 7.4-7.9 PDR84 (PDR84) 15342002 NL2008 7.7-8.5 E 78 J (PDR84) 15342001 (PDR84) NL2011 10.7-11.7 PDR100 E 105 J (PDR100) 15357010 (PDR100) Note 1: To be specified (Bends etc.) Depending on installation arrangement. D4 - Antenna *Use Adapter AAH14 & Srew/gasket kit AWR7 to connect to Radio rack (PDR70 to PDR84).
D. Radio Transmission Connections
D3 - Elliptical Waveguide ANDREW Type of WG (Flange) Connector EWP37-35 EWP43 (PDR40) 137DEMP-2 (PDR48) 143SEM
EWP52-59 (PDR70) 252SEM EWP63-59W (PDR70) 163SEM EWP64-65 EWP64-71 (PDR70) 164SEM (PDR70)** 164SEM (PDR84) 264SEM
EWP77-71W (PDR84) 177SEM EWP90-107 (PDR100) 190SEM ** Nera Antennas, 7.5 GHz, have PDR70 flanges.
Contact Antenna department for selection and information.
1.2
Installation Tools
Mounting of rack Hammer drill Masonry bit, 12 mm Hammer, small Square and Spirit Level Tape Measure and Pencil Hacksaw and File (If cutting of support bar is required. Standard length is 225 mm) Spanner 17 mm (Qty 2) Adjustable spanner 0-20 mm
B4017
69
InterLink 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 Outline Dimensions Rack dimensions, ETSI 2200 mm
$X[6XEUDFN
6XEUDFN$

6XEUDFN%

6XEUDFN&
:,'7+ '(37+
70
B4017
Installation 1.3.1.2 2100 mm
$X[6XEUDFN
6XEUDFN$

6XEUDFN%

6XEUDFN&
:,'7+ '(37+
B4017
71
InterLink 1.3.1.3 1700 mm

$X[6XEUDFN
6XEUDFN$

6XEUDFN%
:,'7+ '(37+
72
B4017
Installation 1.3.2 Rack dimensions, 19"
$X[6XEUDFN
6XEUDFN$

6XEUDFN%

6XEUDFN&
:,'7+ '(37+
B4017
73
InterLink
600
250
50
Adapter Plate
465 (19") Front Panel Mounting 515 (ETSI)
1.3.3
Radio
Waveguide dimensions
'LPHQVLRQVLQPP
Flange
NL2004 Nl2005 Nl2006A Nl2006B Nl2007 Nl2008 Nl2011
UER40 UER48 PDR70 PDR70 PDR84 PDR84 PDR100

Note!
The table shows Waveguide dimensions for ETSI Rack. In 19" rack the Waveguide height will be 10 mm lower.
& $ %
Dir.1 Main
&
Main
NL2000 S.D.
Sp.Div. Dir.2
Top view
74
B4017
Installation
E lliptcal W G Sidewards
'
(
Main 2200/ 2100/ 1700
E Bends
Sp.Div.
NL2000
SIDE VIEW
F RO N T
+
H Bends Elliptcal WG Forwards
Main
Sp.Div.

NL2000
FRONT
SIDE VIEW
B4017
75
InterLink
Elliptcal WG Forwards by E-bends & H-bends
NL2000
Main Main
Sp.Div. Dir.1
Sp.Div. Dir.2
FRONT
Top view
(Height = F)
76
B4017
Installation
2.0
2.1
Transportation & Handling

Packing
The equipment rack is packed in sealed plastic bags and moisture
absorbing bags are inserted. Any separate sensitive product, i.e. printed boards, are packed in anti-static handling bags. All equipment is further packed in special designed cases. Marking is done according to standard practice unless other are specified by customers. .Customers address.Contract No.Site name (if known).Case No. Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the Packing Specification issued for the respective shipment.
2.2
Transportation
The equipment cases are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway and
sea, suitable for handling by forklift trucks and slings. The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage. For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrierowned cargo containers should be used. It is recommended that all equipment should be transported to the installation site in its original packing cases. If any intermediate storing is required, all cases must be stored under dry and cool conditions and out of direct sunlight.
2.3
Handling
It is essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the equipment
and handling printed circuit boards, special precautions should be taken to avoid ESD (Electrostatic Static Discharge). Generally, units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the installation takes place. Ensure you are properly grounded at a controlled ESD point before and during unpacking and handling of any sensitive component.
2.4
Inspection
Check the packing lists and ensure that correct parts numbers quantities Inspect for any damage on the cases and equipment. Report any damage
of goods have arrived.
or discrepancy to Nera Networks AS by mail or fax.
B4017
77
InterLink
3.0
3.1
Equipment Rack Installation

General
Rack code ABW131 (The rack is normally part of the InterLink radio equipment code). The rack can be fixed to the floor by 4 bolts and anchoring plugs. Alignment is done by the adjustable feet. Rack top can be fixed to the wall by two support brackets, bolts and anchoring plugs. Use of support bars enable installation away from wall. The following material are required: Qty 1 Screw & Bracket Kit Qty 1 Support Bar ....... MSK5371 MJK46
Tools required: See List of Tools in Installation Planning
3.2
Procedure
Securing to floor 1.Place the rack upright, without the adjustable feet, and position it according to a layout plan. 2.Put marks through the holes, remove the rack and drill holes in the floor. 3.Put expansion plugs in the holes and hammer gently into place. 4.Mount the adjustable feet (nominal height 28 mm) and place the rack into position. 5.Insert the screws and washers and align the rack to correct vertical position by adjusting the feet. Then tighten the screws. Support of rack top 1.Mount the two support brackets on top of the rack. 2.The rack may be installed directly to the wall. A support bar on wall may be used to place the rack away from any skirting board and enables installation of other racks in a row. The position of support brackets is adjustable. 3.If the rack is installed away from wall, extended support is needed. Use the support bar and brackets to make a frame which can be secured to the wall.
78
B4017
Installation
4.Back-to-back installation may either be done by bracket to bracket mounting or by use of support bar to enable installation of other racks in a row and securing to wall.
Support Bar can be made to frame by cutting to required length and connected by support brackets
449 mm
Support Bar MJK46 (L= 225)
Support Bracket MBB708
Rack Top
75.5
449
75.5
A F A = Positions of adjustable feet (405 x 209) F = Positions of anchoring bolts(measures)
A F
26.5 30
143.5 F F
Rack Bottom
B4017
79
InterLink
Support Bar MJK46
Part of ScrewKit MSK5371 Support Bracket MBB708 (Part of screwkit)
2227
Wall
Rack Side View
Adjustable feet Part of ScrewKit MSK5371
80
B4017
Installation 3.3 3.3.1 Power & Grounding Rack Top Connections
External Earth min 10mm2
Max. 4mm2
+ PWR 1
+ PWR 2
+ PWR 1
+ PWR 2
Subrack A
Subrack B
AUX Subrack 6mm2
Subrack A 6mm2
Subrack B 6mm2
B4017
81
Subrack C 6mm2
InterLink 3.3.2 AUX Subrack Power Connections
Max. 2.5mm2
82
B4017
Installation 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 Internal Power Distribution 1+1 Terminal
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
W ARNI NG
WA RNIN G
POWER
POWER
PWR ON
6XEUDFN$
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
T RANSCEIVE R
T RA NSCE IVER
SUPERVISORY BD MODEM B D
GND
TRAN SCEI VER POWE R CO NNEC TION S TB2 TB3 IC1

+ GND
MODEMBD
+
PWR ON
OFF
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
B4017
83
InterLink 3.3.3.2 1+1 Terminal with AUX Subrack
PWR ON
PWR ON
OFF
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
10
INTFC A A
$X[6XEUDFN
5 4
INTFC A INTFC A A B
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT O UT P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
WAR NING
WAR NING
POWER
POWER
PWR ON
OFF
6XEUDFN$
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
T RA NSCE IVER
T RANSCEI VER
SUPERVISORY BD M BD MODE D MODEM B
GND
TRAN SCEI VER POWE R CO NNEC TION S T B2 TB3 IC1

+ GND
S1
ON 1 2
PWR ON
OFF
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
- GND + - GND +
84
B4017
Installation 3.3.3.3 3+1 Terminal
WA RNIN G
WA RNIN G
WA RNIN G
WAR NING
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
6XEUDFN$
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
21
INTFC A A
20
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
18
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
16
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
6XEUDFN%
M BD MODE
D MODEM B
D MODEM B
SUPERVISORY BD
D MODEM B
PWR ON
OFF
TR AN SC EIVE R PO W ER C ON N EC TI ON S TB2 T B3 S1 IC1

ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
- GND + -
GND
- GND + - GND +
B4017
85
InterLink 3.3.3.4 3+1 Terminal with AUX Subrack
PWR ON
PWR ON
OFF
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
PWR ON PWR ON OFF OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
WARN ING
WARN ING
WA RNIN G
WA RNIN G
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
6XEUDFN$
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
21
INTFC A A
20
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
18
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
16
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
PWR ON
6XEUDFN%
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
M BD MODE
MODEMBD
M BD MODE
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEMBD
PWR ON
OFF
TR A N SC E IVER POW ER C ON N E C TIO N S TB 2 TB3 S1 IC1

ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND
+ -
GND
- GND + - GND +
86
B4017
Installation 3.3.3.5 1+1 Double Terminal
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
W A R NING POWER
W A RNI NG
POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
6XEUDFN$
TRANSCEIVER
TRAN SCEI VER

SUPERVISORY BD EM BD MOD INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD
-
PWR ON
OFF
T RA NSCE IVER POW ER C ONNE CT IO NS T B2 TB 3 IC1

GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
GND
GND +
GND
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
W A RNIN G
W A RNI NG
POWER
POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
6XEUDFN%
TRAN SCEI VER TR ANSC EIVER
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
EM BD MOD
-
PWR ON
OFF
T RANS CEIV ER P OWER CON NECT IONS TB 2 T B3 IC1

GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
GND
GND +
GND
B4017
87
InterLink 3.3.3.6 1+1 Double Terminal with AUX Subrack
PWR ON
PWR ON
OFF
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
PWR ON OFF
PWR ON
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
A
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC B
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
W A RNIN G
W A RNI NG POWER
POWER
PWR ON
6XEUDFN$
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TR ANSC EIVE R
TR ANSC EIVE R
SUPERVISORY BD EM BD MOD INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD
GND
PWR ON
OFF
T RANS CEIV ER P OWER CON NECT IONS TB 2 T B3 IC1

+ GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
10
INTFC A A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A A
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT OU T P U T
INPUT O UT PU T
INPUT O UT PU T
W A RNI NG
W A RNIN G
POWER
POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
6XEUDFN%
TRA NSCE IVER TRANS CEIV ER
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
-
T RAN SCEI VER POWE R CO NNEC T ION S T B2 T B3 IC1

GND
MODEM BD
+ GND
S1
ON 1 2
PWR ON
OFF
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
88
B4017
Installation 3.3.3.7 7+1 Terminal
PWR ON
PWR ON
OFF
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
PWR ON PWR ON PWR ON PWR ON PWR ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
PWR ON
OFF
$X[6XEUDFN
W ARN ING
WAR NIN G POWE R
W ARN ING P OWE R
WAR NIN G POWE R
P OWE R
6XEUDFN$
T RAN SCEI VER TRA NSC EIV ER T RAN SCEI VER TRA NSC EIV ER
21
INTFC A
2 0
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
1 8
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
1 6
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
1 4
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
1 2
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
1 0
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
IN T F C B
INT F C B
I NT F C B
I NT F C B
IN T F C B
INT F C B
I NT F C B
IN T F C B
INT F C B
INT F C B
I NT F C B
INT F C B
INT F C B
I NT F C B
INT F C B
I NT F C B
IN T F C B
INT F C B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
PWR ON
OFF
6XEUDFN%
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
I N TE R FAC E B ASE BAN D B D
MOD EM B D
POW ER
WAR NIN G
TRA NSC EIV ER
MOD EM BD
MOD EM BD
IN T ER F AC E BA SEB AN D BD
MO D EM BD
MO D EM BD
I N TE R FA C E BASE BAN D B D
MOD EM B D
IN T ER FA C E BAS EBA N D BD
MOD EM B D

- GN D + GN D
IN T ER F AC E BA SEB AN D BD
+
M OD E M B D
G ND
SU PER VISOR Y BD
PWR ON OFF
S 1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
G ND
WA RNI NG POW ER
WA RNIN G POW ER
WA RNI NG PO WER
6XEUDFN&
TRAN SCE IVE R TRA NSC EIV ER T RAN SCE IVE R
B4017
89
InterLink

90
B4017
Commissioning
SECTION III
Commissioning
B4017
91
InterLink

92
B4017
Commissioning
1.0
External Connections
Fig. 1-1 Connector location
B4017
93
InterLink 1.1 Phone Connections
Fig 1-2 Phone Connections 94

B4017
Commissioning
3+21(-DQG3+21(-

3LQQR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Invertible Modular jacks, 8 positions for SMT applications (RJ45).
'HVFULSWLRQ
No Connection No Connection No Connection TIP RING No Connection No Connection No Connection
B4017
95
InterLink 1.2 LAN Connections
Fig 1-3 LAN Connections 96

B4017
Commissioning
/$173-OLQHLPSHGDQFH
3LQQR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
,QYHUWLEOHPRGXODUMDFNSRVLWLRQVIRU607DSSOLFDWLRQV
'HVFULSWLRQ
Data+ output Data- output Data+ input No Connection No Connection Data- input No Connection No Connection
B4017
97
InterLink 1.3 NI Connections
Fig 1-4 NI Connections 98

B4017
Commissioning
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVIHPDOH
1,-
NI-1, data- input NI-1, data+ input NI-1, GND NI-1, data+ output NI-1, data- output NI-1, clk- input NI-1, clk+ input NI-1, clk+ output NI-1, clk- output
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVIHPDOH
1,-
NI-2, data- input NI-2, data+ input NI-2, GND NI-2, data+ output NI-2, data- output NI-2, clk- input NI-2, clk+ input NI-2, clk+ output NI-2, clk- output
B4017
99
InterLink 1.4 LCT1 Connection
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT O UTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT O UTPUT
INPUT OU TPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT O UTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT O UTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
SVCE BD MODEM BD INTERFACE BASEBAND BD SUPERVISORY BD MODEM BD
- GND + GND
PWR ON
OFF

+ - GND + GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
Fig 1-5 LCT1 Connection 100

B4017
Commissioning
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVPDOH
/&73
No Connection LCT1, RS-232C data input LCT1, RS232C data output Connected to pin 6 GND Connected to pin 4 Connected to pin 8 Connected to pin 7 No Connection
B4017
101
InterLink 1.5 LCT2 Connection
Fig 1-6 LCT2 Connection 102

B4017
Commissioning
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVPDOH
/&73
No Connection LCT2, RS-232C data input LCT2, RS232C data output Connected to pin 6 GND Connected to pin 4 Connected to pin 8 Connected to pin 7 No Connection
B4017
103
InterLink 1.6 Alarm Connections
Fig 1-7 Alarm Connections 104

B4017
Commissioning
&RQQ1R 'HVFULSWLRQ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7HUPLQDO%ORFNFRQQHFWLRQV
$/067%
Critical-alarm; closed when alarm is active Critical-alarm; common terminal Critical-alarm; open when alarm is active Major/minor-alarm; closed when alarm is active Major/minor-alarm; common terminal Major/minor-alarm; open when alarm is active Warning-indicator; closed when alarm is active Warning-indicator; common terminal Warning-indicator; open when alarm is active Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); closed when alarm is active Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); common terminal Power ON-alarm (PWR 1); open when alarm is active Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); closed when alarm is active Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); common terminal Power ON-alarm (PWR 2); open when alarm is active Not used
B4017
105
InterLink 1.7 Power Connections
Fig 1-8 Power Connections 106

B4017
Commissioning
3LQ1R
1 2
3RZHU'6XESRZHUSLQVLQDSLQV'6XEKRXVLQJ
3:53
'HVFULSWLRQ
Power 1, Input, +BAT (GND) Power 1, Input, -BAT
3LQ1R
1 2
3RZHU'6XESRZHUSLQVLQDSLQV'6XEKRXVLQJ
3:53
'HVFULSWLRQ
Power 2, Input, +BAT (GND) Power 2, Input, -BAT
B4017
107
InterLink 1.8 Internal Power Distribution
Fig 1-9 Internal Power Distribution 108

B4017
Commissioning
,QWHUQDO3RZHU'LVWULEXWLRQ7%DQG7%
&RQQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6
'HVFULSWLRQ
7HUPLQDO%ORFNFRQQHFWLRQV
Power-common fed, output, -BAT GND Power-common fed, output, +BAT Power-common fed, output, -BAT GND Power-common fed, output, +BAT
B4017
109
InterLink 1.9 External Connections
Fig 1-10 External Connections 110

B4017
Commissioning
([WHUQDO&RQQHFWLRQV-
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVIHPDOH
GND GND POSADR_A5 on Connection Panel I2C-bus, clk. External Alarm input #2 External Alarm input #4 External Alarm input #6 External Alarm input #8 +3.3V output, from Alarm Display & Relay Board POSADR_A6 on Connection Panel I2C-bus, data External Alarm input #1 External Alarm input #3 External Alarm input #5 External Alarm input #7
Note!
For future expansion. Internal Nera use only. External alarm inputs are located on Auxiliary Services Board.
B4017
111
InterLink 1.10 SU Serial Channels
Fig 1-11 SU Serial Channels 112

B4017
Commissioning
686HULDO&KDQQHOV-
3LQ1R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
'HVFULSWLRQ
'6XESLQVIHPDOH
No Connection Serial data, output Serial data, input No Connection Serial data, GND No Connection Serial data, input Serial data, output No Connection
Note!
Internal Nera use only.
B4017
113
InterLink 1.11 Board Interface

The Board Interface is available on the top of the Connection Panel.
1.11.1
Slot numbering and board placement

A Connection Board Smaller Systems includes 11 slots (numbered from 0 to 10), and a Connection Board Larger Systems includes 22 slots (numbered from 0 to 21). Slots are numbered from the right to the left, i.e. slots 0 to 10 are identical for both smaller and larger systems. Note that the different connection areas on the upper part of the connection panel are marked with the slot number of the connected circuit board. slot 0 : for Alarm Display & Relay Board (between upper and lower Power Filtering Boards) slot 1 : for upper Power Filtering Board slot 2 : for lower Power Filtering Board slot 3 : for Supervisory Board only slot 4 : for SVCE Board 1 when using telephone handset connected to PHONE4, else for slot independent boards slot 5 : for SVCE Board 2 when using telephone handset connected to PHONE5, else for slot independent boards slot 6-10 : Connection Board Smaller Systems, or slot 6-21 : Connection Board Larger Systems: slot independent boards Slot independent boards are: - Modem Board (all versions) - Interface Baseband Board (all versions, electrical line interface) - Optical Interface Baseband Board (all versions) - SVCE Board (all versions) when not using the telephone handset - Auxiliary Services Board - 2MHz Sync Board Slot independent boards are all using the same basic connection area on the upper part of the connection panel (the connection area to use is given by the slot in which the circuit board is placed), but the different boards use the available connectors individually.
114
B4017
Commissioning
Note that the Modem Board(s) and Interface Baseband Board(s) (electrical/optical) have to be mutually placed in an order determined by the chosen system configuration. The configuration wizard in NEW-NMS shows a layout of the board placement based on the system parameters input.
21
INTFC A
20
INTFC A
19
INTFC A
18
INTFC A
17
INTFC A
16
INTFC A
15
INTFC A
14
INTFC A
13
INTFC A
12
INTFC A
11
INTFC A
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
MODEM BD
Fig 1-12 Board Arrangement

B4017
MODEM BD
SVCE BD
SUPERVISORY BD
MODEM BD
MODEM BD
PWR ON
OFF

GND
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
+ -
GND
GND
+ -
GND
115
InterLink
Fig 1-13 Board Interface 116

B4017
Commissioning 1.11.2 Service Board PABX
a b c d e
,17)&$ 6ORW1RD
,17)&$ 6ORW1RE
,17)&$ 6ORW1RF
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
X X
X X
G.703, Ch1 V.11, Ch2 Byte V.11 (Tx/Rx), Ch2
X X
X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X
Other Equipment Control EOW Call 4W, E/M-Wire GND GND
X X X X
Co Directional, G.703 Contra Directional, G.703 V.11
PABX Tip & Ring GND Ext. Loudsp. signal & GND Ext. Tlf. Tip & Ring GND
Input Signal Output Signal GND Not Connected
B4017
117
InterLink
3LQ QR ,17)&$ 6ORW1RD

1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 1TxD+_G703 1TxD-_G703 No Connection 1RxD+_G703 1RxD-_G703 1TxC+_G703 1TxC-_G703 No Connection 1RxC+_G703 1RxC-_G703 2TxD+_V11 2TxD-_V11 No Connection 2RxD+_V11 2RxD-_V11 2TxC+_V11 2TxC-_V11 No Connection 2RxC+_V11 2RxC-_V11 2TxB+_V11 2TxB-_V11 No Connection 2RxB+_V11 2RxB-_V11 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
'HVFULSWLRQ ,17)&$ ,17)&$ 6ORW1RE 6ORW1RF

3TxD+_G703 3TxD-_G703 No Connection 3RxD+_G703 3RxD-_G703 3TxC+_G703 3TxC-_G703 No Connection 3RxC+_G703 3RxC-_G703 4TxD+_V11 4TxD-_V11 No Connection 4RxD+_V11 4RxD-_V11 4TxC+_V11 4TxC-_V11 No Connection 4RxC+_V11 4RxC-_V11 4TxB+_V11 4TxB-_V11 No Connection 4RxB+_V11 4RxB-_V11 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
69&(%RDUG3$%;,QWHUIDFH
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) PABX_T GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) PABX_R GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) EXTTEL_T GND LS (PCB) LOUDSP GND (PCB) GND (PCB) EXTTEL_R GND (PCB) GND (PCB) 1OEINP_A 1OEINP_B CTRL_INP 1OEOUT_A 1OEOUT_B 2OEINP_A 2OEINP_B CTRL_OUT 2OEOUT_A 2OEOUT_B EOWINP_A EOWINP_B CALL_INP EOWOUT_A EOWOUT_B No Connection No Connection CALL_OUT No Connection No Connection 4WINP_A 4WINP_B M_WIRE 4WOUT_A 4WOUT_B GND (PCB) GND (PCB) E_WIRE GND (PCB) GND (PCB)
,17)&% ,QSXW
No Connection
,17)&% 2XWSXW
No Connection
'HVFULSWLRQ ,17)&& ,QSXW

No Connection
,17)&& 2XWSXW
No Connection
118
B4017
Commissioning 1.11.3 Service Board (without PABX)
a b c d e
,17)&$ 6ORW1RD
,17)&$ 6ORW1RE
,17)&$ 6ORW1RF
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X
Other Equipment Control EOW Call 4W, E/M-Wire GND GND GND
X X
Ext. Loudsp. signal & GND Ext. Tlf. Tip & Ring GND
B4017
119
InterLink

1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 1TxD+_G703 1TxD-_G703 No Connection 1RxD+_G703 1RxD-_G703 1TxC+_G703 1TxC-_G703 No Connection 1RxC+_G703 1RxC-_G703 2TxD+_V11 2TxD-_V11 No Connection 2RxD+_V11 2RxD-_V11 2TxC+_V11 2TxC-_V11 No Connection 2RxC+_V11 2RxC-_V11 2TxB+_V11 2TxB-_V11 No Connection 2RxB+_V11 2RxB-_V11 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection

3TxD+_G703 3TxD-_G703 No Connection 3RxD+_G703 3RxD-_G703 3TxC+_G703 3TxC-_G703 No Connection 3RxC+_G703 3RxC-_G703 4TxD+_V11 4TxD-_V11 No Connection 4RxD+_V11 4RxD-_V11 4TxC+_V11 4TxC-_V11 No Connection 4RxC+_V11 4RxC-_V11 4TxB+_V11 4TxB-_V11 No Connection 4RxB+_V11 4RxB-_V11 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
69&(%RDUG,QWHUIDFH
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) No Connection GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) GND (PCB) EXTTEL_T GND LS (PCB) LOUDSP GND (PCB) GND (PCB) EXTTEL_R GND (PCB) GND (PCB) 1OEINP_A 1OEINP_B CTRL_INP 1OEOUT_A 1OEOUT_B 2OEINP_A 2OEINP_B CTRL_OUT 2OEOUT_A 2OEOUT_B EOWINP_A EOWINP_B CALL_INP EOWOUT_A EOWOUT_B No Connection No Connection CALL_OUT No Connection No Connection 4WINP_A 4WINP_B M_WIRE 4WOUT_A 4WOUT_B GND (PCB) GND (PCB) E_WIRE GND (PCB) GND (PCB)
,17)&% ,QSXW
No Connection
,17)&% 2XWSXW
No Connection

No Connection
,17)&& 2XWSXW
No Connection
120
B4017
Commissioning 1.11.4 Auxiliary Services Board
a b c d e
,17)&$ 6ORW1RD
,17)&$ 6ORW1RE
,17)&$ 6ORW1RF
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ALARM INP ANALOG INP
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
RELAY OUTP 250mA RELAY OUTP 1A
B4017
121
InterLink

1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e ALM_1+ ALM_1ALM_5+ ALM_2+ ALM_2ALM_3+ ALM_3ALM_5ALM_4+ ALM_4ALM_6+ ALM_6ALM_10+ ALM_7+ ALM_7ALM_8+ ALM_8ALM_10ALM_9+ ALM_9ALM_11+ ALM_11ALM_15+ ALM_12+ ALM_12ALM_13+ ALM_13ALM_15ALM_14+ ALM_14-
$X[LOLDU\6HUYLFHV%RDUG,QWHUIDFH
'HVFULSWLRQ ,17)&$ ,17)&$ 6ORW1RE 6ORW1RF ,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection RELAY_2a No Connection No Connection RELAY_1a RELAY_1b RELAY_2b RELAY_3a RELAY_3b RELAY_4a RELAY_4b RELAY_5a RELAY_6a RELAY_6b RELAY_7a RELAY_7b RELAY_5b RELAY_8a RELAY_8b ALM_16+ ALM_16ALM_20+ ALM_17+ ALM_17ALM_18+ ALM_18ALM_20ALM_19+ ALM_19ALM_21+ ALM_21ALM_25+ ALM_22+ ALM_22ALM_23+ ALM_23ALM_25ALM_24+ ALM_24ALM_26+ ALM_26ALM_30+ ALM_27+ ALM_27ALM_28+ ALM_28ALM_30ALM_29+ ALM_29ALM_31+ ALM_31ALM_35+ ALM_32+ ALM_32ALM_33+ ALM_33ALM_35ALM_34+ ALM_34ALM_36+ ALM_36ALM_40+ ALM_37+ ALM_37ALM_38+ ALM_38ALM_40ALM_39+ ALM_39ANALOG_1 ANALOG_2 ANALOG_GND ANALOG_3 ANALOG_4 ANALOG_5 ANALOG_6 ANALOG_GND ANALOG_7 ANALOG_8
,17)&% ,QSXW
No Connection
,17)&% 2XWSXW
No Connection

No Connection
,17)&& 2XWSXW
No Connection
122
B4017
Commissioning 1.11.5 Interface Baseband Boards
a b c d e
,17)&$ 6ORW1RD
,17)&$ 6ORW1RE
,17)&$ 6ORW1RF
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2.048 Mb/s Wayside
B4017
123
InterLink

1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e
,QWHUIDFH%DVHEDQG%RDUGV%RDUG,QWHUIDFH
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection 2M_Tx_Way+ 2M_Tx_WayNo Connection 2M_Rx_Way+ 2M_Rx_WayNo Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
,17)&% ,QSXW
No Connection
,17)&% 2XWSXW
No Connection

155M_INP
,17)&& 2XWSXW
155M_OUTP
124
B4017
Commissioning 1.11.6 Modem Board STM-1
a b c d e
,17)&$ 6ORW1RD
,17)&$ 6ORW1RE
,17)&$ 6ORW1RF
,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ind-Outd Interface
B4017
125
InterLink

1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
0RGHP%RDUG670,QWHUIDFH
'HVFULSWLRQ ,17)&$ ,17)&$ 6ORW1RE 6ORW1RF ,17)&$ 6ORW1RG
No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection D+3.3V GND No Connection I2C_SDA I2C_SCL No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection
,17)&% ,QSXW
No Connection
,17)&% 2XWSXW
ER_PULSE

No Connection
,17)&& 2XWSXW
No Connection
126
B4017
Commissioning
2.0
2.1
Configuration
Setting of Subrack address
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM BD SVCE BD INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD
- GND + GND
SUPERVISORY BD
PWR ON OFF

+ GND +
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND
Fig. 2-1 Subrack Addresses

B4017
127
InterLink
ON = 1 ON OFF = 0
6ZLWFK$
0 / OFF 0 / OFF 1 / ON 1 / ON
6ZLWFK$ $GGUHVV
0 / OFF 1 / ON 0 / OFF 1 / ON
6XEUDFNDGGUHVVHV6
Connection Panel address 0 Connection Panel address 1 Connection Panel address 2 Connection Panel address 3 (00) (01) (10) (11)
Note!
The Subrack address switch is factory preset and must not be altered. Correct switch position is OFF on both switches.
128
B4017
Commissioning
3.0 Power on (incl. NEW-NMS start-up and initial config.)

3.1 General
This chapter assumes that the radio terminal has been installed according to the guidelines in Sections II Installation. Verify that the cable between radio terminal and the PC running the configuration & setup program is connected.
3.2
Power on
Apply power to the radio terminal by turning the switch on the Power Filters on the Subrack and Aux-Subrack if mounted. The radio link startup procedure and self-diagnostics will execute. When power is applied to the radio terminal the system will perform self test, this will take a few seconds.
3.3
NEW-Configurator Start-up and connecting to Network Elements

The NEW-Configurator (Nera Element vieW-Configurator) program must be installed on a PC with the following minimum requirements: NT4.0/Win95/Win98 and Win2000 operating system Pentium 133MHz processor 32MB memory 200MB disk size 1 COM port CD-ROM drive
Follow carefully the program installation instructions to make sure the program is successfully installed. The element viewer can monitor the Network Elements (NEs) using a serial connection (RS-232) or a TCP/IP connection (or both for different network elements). Apply all external connections to the PC before the program is started. A serial connection must be used the first time the network manager/ configurator is connected to the InterLink, because the IP address must be set in the InterLink, before a TCP/IP connection can be established.
B4017
129
InterLink 3.3.1 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT).

Apply the serial cable to one of the serial ports of the PC and the LCT port of the InterLink. Start the program. A Log on dialogue box pops up. Log on to the network with your user id and password. Note! NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account: User ID: admin Password: adminpasswd It is strongly recommended to change this password! The program has an auto discover function which automatically discovers NEs connected to the serial ports of the PC when starting. If some NEs are connected to the serial ports of the PC, the network topology is automatically discovered and presented in the Explorer view. Press Add to include discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The auto discover function can also be manually executed by selecting Discover from the File menu. When discovering the network manually, the program looks for NEs at the open ports listed in the Communication dialogue box (select Communication from the Configuration menu).
3.3.2
(Assumes the TCP/IP address is configured in the InterLink ) Apply Ethernet connections to both the InterLink and PC. Start the program. A Log on dialogue box pops up. Log on to the network with your user id and password. Note! NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account: User ID: admin Password: adminpasswd It is strongly recommended to change this password! The program does not know the IP-address of the network element so the connection must be manually established. To configure a TCP/IP connection to the network element, select Communication from the Configuration menu. Press the Add button and type the IP address of the NE in the address field of the dialogue box which pops up. Press OK to save the changes, and OK to close the Communication Configuration dialogue box. Select Discover from the File menu. Press Add to include discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The accepted network elements will be discovered and presented in the Explorer view. 130
B4017
Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with TCP/IP Connection.
Commissioning 3.4 Initial configuration

When the program has established contact with the InterLink, some configurations must be set before antenna alignment can be performed. See Element ID and Unit Housekeeping in Section IV, Operators Guide. You are now ready to proceed with antenna alignment.
B4017
131
InterLink
4.0
Antenna alignment
The purpose of the alignment procedure is to obtain maximum signal level and cross polarization discrimination by aligning two antennas in opposite directions. The antennas should be properly mounted (Follow the manufacturers mechanical alignment instructions) and polarized in the same way. It must be possible to transmit from one antenna and receive on the other. The best way is to have a transmitter and a receiver connected to both antennas.
4.1
Procedure for Coarse-alignment

Adjust both antennas to correct directions as precisely as possible by using magnetic compass or optical sight.
4.2
Procedure for Fine-alignment

Fine adjustment is achieved by sending a signal from one of the antennas. On the receive side various methods may be used. a) Measure the AGC voltage from the transceiver b) Read the received level on a spectrum analyser c) Measure the received power with a Power Meter This procedure describes antenna alignment by use of AGC Voltage. The AGC Voltage is available at a test point on the lower part of the Transceiver Sub rack. Operate the supervisory system to manually switch the equipment to Ch1. See Section IV, Operators Guide, Chapter 2.1.3.1.5. Mute the transmitter at the receive station to exclude interference from this source. A voltmeter must be connected to the AGC2 connector and ground, and preferably monitored by the person who is adjusting the antenna. Adjust alternatively in azimuth and elevation until the received signal reaches maximum level. Try a few times in each direction. The antenna should be turned so much that the first side lobes are seen, thereby ensuring that the antenna is aligned to the main lobe.
132
B4017
Commissioning
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
C D
C D
3 2 1
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC B
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPUT
WARNING POWER
WARNING POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
INTERFACE BASEBAND BD SVCE BD MODEM BD
8 1' 1* %2 3 + 2 5$ 71 (
,
SUPERVISORY BD
TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3 IC1 AGC1 AGC2

GND
+ -
MODEM BD
GND
PWR ON
OFF
S1 S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON) CON)
J2 (SU TEST)
GND +
GND
81' 1* %2 3 + 2 7 5 71 $(
,
,
AGC1 AGC2
Note! In a 1+1 system AGC1 is AGC connector for Protection Channel and AGC2 is connector for Ch1.
Fig. 4-1 AGC Connectors

B4017
133
InterLink
When the antenna is correctly adjusted, secure all bolts. Monitor the instrument during this operation and if necessary realign the antenna. When adjustments are completed on the first antenna, the same procedure is performed on the opposite antenna.
4.3
Cross Polarization Adjustment

After alignment of the antenna, the antenna feed must be adjusted horizontally and vertically. Loosen the flange which secures the feed to the reflector. Align the feed by using a spirit leveller. Secure the flange.
4.4
Final Control
When all adjustments are performed check that the input level agrees with the one theoretically calculated. If the input level is too low, adjust the antennas once more. Finally, ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly mounted and secured.
134
B4017
Operators Guide
SECTION IV
Operators Guide
B4017
135
InterLink

136
B4017
Operators Guide
1.0
Introduction
The InterLink-family of radio equipment supports a wide range of element management functions: Security, Configuration, Fault and Performance. All these functions can be managed by the PC based network management program, NEW. NEW supports different families of Nera radio equipment, including the InterLink. This section describes the management functions of the InterLink network element and the corresponding element management functions in NEW.
1.1
NEW
NEW is a fully compliant 32-bits Windows application running on PC with the following operating system requirements: NEW-Configurator: Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000. NEW-NMS: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000. This manual describes the functionality of NEW that applies to the InterLink family of network elements. See the NEW-NMS Manual or program help system for more information about NEW.
1.1.1
Versions
The NEW program can either be used as a network element configuration tool (NEW-Configurator) or a network management system (NEWNMS). A hardware key, connected to the PCs parallel port contains user license information which is used by NEW to determine whether to run the program in Configurator mode or in NMS mode. This licence information also includes the number of elements and the family of equipment to be supported by NEW. To upgrade your license, contact NERA and you will receive upgrading information.
1.1.1.1
NEW-NMS
When a licensed hardware key is connected to the PCs parallel port, the program will run as NEW-NMS with the restrictions given by the hardware key. NEW-NMS is a network manager offering a wide range of network management facilities. NEW-NMS is also available in a client/server configuration. [See the NEW-NMS manual for more details]
B4017
137
InterLink 1.1.1.2. NEW-Configurator

If no hardware key is connected when NEW is started, the program will run in Configurator mode. The NEW-Configurator can only monitor and configure two network elements simultaneously. Typical network management functions are not supported by this version (e.g. Database logging and Map View).
1.1.2 1.1.2.1
Graphical User Interface (GUI) Menus

The different functions and user interfaces in NEW can be accessed through the main menu or context menus in the different views. Some of the main menu commands are only enabled when certain objects are selected. These menus are marked with the symbol.
1.1.2.2
Explorer View
NEW can present the network of elements in two different main views: Explorer View and Map View. (The Map View is only available in the NEW-NMS version and is described in the NEW-NMS User Manual). The Explorer View is automatically displayed when the first NE is detected by NEW. This window displays a hierarchical presentation of all detected NEs in the network. The nodes in the tree contain different context menus for configuration and surveillance. They also displays alarm severity information by using colours. The InterLink NE is divided into two main branches: Equipment and Transmission. The Transmission branch contains information related to the customer traffic while the Equipment branch contains Equipment related information.
138
B4017
Operators Guide
1.1.2.3
Physical View
A physical drawing of the network element can be displayed from the context menu on the NE node. The different boards/units in the view contain the same context menus as the corresponding tree nodes in the Explorer View. Note that this view does not display any alarm information (The LED indicators does not represent any actual alarm status). The front cover is not displayed.
B4017
139
InterLink
1.1.2.4
Schematic View
A schematic drawing of the system configuration can be displayed from a menu command on the NE node. This block diagram shows how the boards/ units are interconnected by means of traffic. The different units in the view contain the same context menus as the corresponding tree nodes in the Explorer View. Note that this view does not display any switching or alarm information.
140
B4017
Operators Guide
1.1.3
Communication
NEW communicates with the Network Elements through different communication ports: serial ports, modem ports or TCP/IP ports. The serial ports and modems registered by the operating system are automatically detected while TCP/IP ports have to be added manually. A backup port can be assigned for each port. The backup port will be used when a message on the main port times out. When using the backup port, messages are periodically also sent to the main port in order to detect whether the main port has recovered. If the message times out when using the backup port, the message gets lost, even if the backup port has its own backup port. In other words; the message will only be routed one level through the backup system. Note that NEW will try to keep the port in the selected state. This means that if the port is disconnected by any reason other than the user pressing the Disconnect button, NEW will automatically try to reconnect. NEW will automatically retry the connect attempts using an increasing interval of time (up to maximum 5 minutes retry interval).
B4017
141
InterLink 1.1.3.1 Discovering Network Elements

When starting NEW, opening a network file or selecting the Discover command from the File menu the auto discover process is initiated: When starting NEW from scratch all available serial communication ports are attempted opened. Broadcast messages are sent to all open ports using several different baud rates to detect connected network elements (115200, 9600 and 1200). When opening a network file the communication settings saved in the network file are used in the discovering process. NEW loads the communication port settings and status form the network file. Broadcast messages are sent to all open ports to detect connected network elements. When selecting the Discover command from the File menu the current communication settings are used in the discovering process. Broadcast messages are sent to all open ports to detect connected network elements. If a correct response is received from a network element, the Add Element dialogue box is displayed where the user can add the element to NEW.
Dialogue box controls: Max elements to be added: The maximum number of network elements to be managed by NEW according to the licence information in the hardware key. If no hardware key is connected, the maximum number of elements is 2. Left list: Discovered network elements. Right list: The network elements to be managed by NEW. Add All button: Moves all network elements from the Left list to the Right list. Add Selected button: Moves selected network elements from the Left list to the Right list. 142
B4017
Operators Guide
Remove Selected button: Moves selected network elements from the Right list to the Left list. Remove All button: Moves all network elements from the Right list to the Left list. OK button: Adds the network elements in the Right list to NEW and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box.
1.1.3.2
Communication Settings
The Communication settings can be displayed/configured in the Communication dialogue box in the Configuration menu.
Dialogue box controls: Communication Ports: List of all available communication ports. - Status: Indicates the state of the communication ports. Possible states: Connected, Connecting..., Disconnecting..., Disconnected. For modem ports the call states are also displayed. - Port: Name of the communication port. - Backup: Name of the communication backup port. - Network: The associated sub-network of the communication port. To change sub-network, double-click the field and choose between available sub-networks. - Timeout Limit (ms): Sets the global time (in milliseconds) that NEW will wait for acknowledgement on a message before re-sending it. When the check-box is unchecked, the individual NE time-out values are used. [See NEW-NMS Manual]
B4017
143
InterLink
Close button: Closes the dialogue box. Connect button: Opens the selected communication port. A discover message is sent on the port if the connection succeeds. Disconnect button: Closes the selected communication port. Remove button: Removes the selected communication port. (Applies to TCP/ IP ports only) Add button: Adds a communication port. (Applies to TCP/IP ports only) Settings button: Displays a Port Settings dialogue box for the selected communication port, where the port can be configured. Elements button: Displays the Element Communication Map dialogue box where each network elements communication settings can be configured [See the NEW-NMS Manual] Networks button: Displays the Sub-network Administration dialogue box where sub-networks can be created or deleted. [see the NEW-NMS Manual]
1.1.3.3
Serial Port Settings

The Serial Port Settings dialogue box displays/configures the settings for the selected serial port.
Dialogue box controls (the configuration to use with InterLink elements are displayed in brackets): Baud Rate: The number of bits transmitted per second (Default: 115200). Data Bits: The number of bits in a word of data (8). Parity: The number of parity bits used for Forward Error Correction (None) Stop bits: The number of stop bits used to indicate where each word of data ends (1). 144
B4017
Operators Guide
Flow control: The way to control the transmission rate of characters or messages on the link (None). OK button: Applies the current control settings and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Default button: Loads the serial ports default settings into the controls (115200, 8, None, 1, None). Help button: displays help for this dialogue box
1.1.3.4
TCP/IP Port Settings

The TCP/IP Port Settings dialogue box displays/configures the settings for the selected TCP/IP port. Note that NEW uses TCP-port 5070 for accessing a InterLink element via the Ethernet interface.
Dialogue box controls: Address: The TCP/IP address. Network: Indicates the associated sub-network of the port. All NEs reached by a specific port belongs to the sub-network of that port. The drop-down combo box can be used to choose between available subnetworks. (Default: Main) SNMP Element: Used to connect to NEs supporting the Simple Network Management Protocol. Not used with InterLink. OK button: Applies the current control settings and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Network button: Displays the sub-network administration dialogue box. [see the NEW-NMS Manual] Help button: displays help for this dialogue box. Modem Port Settings: [see the NEW-NMS manual]
B4017
145
InterLink
2.0
2.1.1 NE Node
&RQWH[WPHQX
Configuration
The following table describes the configuration functions for the NE node.
Menu text Unit Housekeeping Wizard Element ID Available Functions Notifications NE Clock Configuration Upload Configuration Download Restore Configuration SW Versions SW Download Remote Reset Description Displays a wizard for NE system configuration Displays the Element ID property sheet Displays the Available Functions property sheet Displays the Notifications property sheet Displays the NE Clock property sheet Uploads configuration data from NE to file Downloads configuration data from file to the NE Sets default configuration on NE Displays the SW Versions property sheet Downloads SW from file to NE Resets the NE across the hop.
2.1.1.1
System Configuration and Unit Housekeeping

Assembling different sub-racks, boards and units into a network element is facilitated through a set of system configuration functions. Which units/ boards to be used for a specific system configuration, and their placement within the system, are defined by a set of rules. These rules are partly set by hardware and partly managed by the user through system configuration functions. The Supervisory Board controls the system configuration through a set of functions that is configured from NEW: NEW provides a wizard for setting the system configuration. The placement of boards/units are set through this wizard. Transceiver Units, Modem Boards, and Interface Baseband Boards are associated with a transmission channel and direction. Alarms are reported if there is a difference between the configured system and the units/boards detected by the Supervisory Board. NEW is notified if changes in the system configuration are detected and provides different user interfaces for handling the situations. The process of replacing a board/unit is facilitated through automatic configuration by the SU. NEW provides a wizard for replacing the Supervisory Board.
2.1.1.1.1.
Alarms
Alarms are generated if the Supervisory Board detects any deviation from the configured system: BOARD-INCORRECT-PLACED: A board/unit has been detected in a slot that violates the board/unit placement rules. Remove the board/unit. NEW-BOARD-DETECTED: A board/unit has been detected in a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a New Board Detected menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialogue box where an appropriate action can be performed. NEW-TRANSCEIVER-DETECTED: A Transceiver Unit that does not support Space Diversity has been configured as a Space Diversity Trans-
146
B4017
Operators Guide
ceiver. Replace the Transceiver Unit with a correct type or use the Unit Housekeeping Wizard to change the Space Diversity system configuration. UNIT-BEING-REPLACED: This alarm is generated when the reset button on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit process [see the Replacing Boards/Units section]. NEED-CONFIG: This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping Wizard or the Configuration Download function. If NEW is connected to the NE directly through the LCT port, a System Change Detected dialogue box pops up [see the System Change Detected section]. LOST-CONTACT-WITH-UNIT: This alarm indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit.
2.1.1.1.2
This version of NEW (R7D00) supports the system configurations and boards/units listed below. Please upgrade to a newer version of NEW if your network contains system configurations not specified below. Supported systems: N+0 Terminal, where N=1..8 N+1 Terminal without Low Priority Traffic, where N=1..7 N+1 Terminal with Low Priority Traffic, where N=1..7 Hot Stand-by Terminal (one interface board) Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband Terminal (two interface boards) (Dual polarization and co-channel is supported on all the above systems except Hot Stand-by Terminal and Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband Terminal.) Supported Boards/Units: Baseband sub-rack for Smaller Systems Baseband sub-rack for Larger Systems Transceiver sub-rack Auxiliary sub-rack Supervisory Board Alarm Display & Relay Board Power Filtering Board SVCE Board SVCE Board PABX Interface Baseband Board STM-1 Optical SMF Interface Baseband Board STM-1 Optical MMF Interface Baseband Board STM-1 Modem Board STM-1 Transceiver Unit Transceiver Unit SD
Supported systems and boards/units
B4017
147
InterLink 2.1.1.1.3 Board/Unit placement rules

The placement rules are partly set by hardware and partly managed by the user through system configuration functions. Smaller Systems Baseband Sub-rack for Smaller Systems: This sub-rack contains a compartment for the Connection-Panel and compartments for 2 Transceiver Units and branching. The position of the Connection-Panel and Transceiver Units within the sub-rack depends on the branching solutions for the Transceiver Units. - Alarm Display & Relay Board: Slot 0. - Power Filters: Slot 1 and/or 2. - Supervisory board: Slot 3. - SVCE Boards: Slot 4 and 5. Slot 4 is used if there is only one SVCE Board. - Modem and Interface Baseband Boards: These boards are placed in Slot 10 to 5 in the Connection-Panel. Boards are placed from left to right (starting with Slot 10) according to their associated channel number in this order: Ch.P - Ch.1 Ch.N. For Terminal systems, the Modem Boards are always placed to the left of the corresponding Interface Baseband Boards. The following table shows the placement of Modem- and Interface Baseband- Boards for different channel arrangements (I=Interface Baseband Board, M=Modem Board, X=Transceiver Units) - Transceiver Units: If there are 1 or 2 Transceiver Units in the system, the Transceiver Units are placed in the Baseband Sub-rack. If the system uses single polarization the Transceiver Units may optionally be placed on the left side or on the right side of the sub-rack. If dual polarization is used, one Transceiver Unit is placed on each side of the sub-rack. The Transceiver Unit with the lowest channel number is placed in the outmost position. Transceiver Sub-rack: If there are more than two Transceiver Units in the system, all Transceiver Units are placed in a Transceiver Sub-rack. This Transceiver Sub-rack is always placed above the Baseband Sub-rack. - For single polarization systems the branching is always inserted from the left side of the sub-rack. - For Dual polarization systems, branching is inserted at both sides of the sub-rack. - Transceiver Units are placed from their associated branching, according to their associated channel number in this order: Ch.P - Ch.1 Ch.N.
148
B4017
Operators Guide
6\VWHP&RQILJXUDWLRQ([DPSOHV6PDOOHU 6\VWHPV
1+0 Terminal 1+1 Terminal (single polarization) 1+1 Terminal with LPT (single polarization) 2+0 Terminal (single polarization) 2+1 Terminal (single polarization) 3+0 Terminal (single polarization) HSB Terminal (one interface board) HSB Dual Baseband Terminal (two interface boards) 2+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=2, WG.right=1) 3+0 Terminal (dual polarization WG.left=2, WG.right=1) 3+1 Terminal (dual polarization WG.left=2, WG.right=2)
%DVHEDQG6XEUDFNVORWSRVLWLRQV ;&95
X1 XP XP X1 X1 X1 X2 M1 MP MP M1 Mp M1 M1 M1

X1 X1
X2 X2
I1 M1 IP I1 M1 I1 I1 I1

I1 M1 M2 I1 M2 M2 M2
;&956XEUDFN VORWSRVLWLRQV
I1 I2 M2 I2 I2 M3 I3 I2
XP X1
X1 X2
X2 X3
XP X1 XP
X1 X2 X1 X3
X2 X3 X2
Larger Systems Baseband Sub-rack for Larger Systems: This sub-rack contains a Connection-Panel with 22 slots, and is always used in conjunction with one or two Transceiver Sub-racks. - Alarm Display & Relay Board: Slot 0. - Power Filters: Slot 1 and/or 2. - Supervisory board: Slot 3. - SVCE Boards: Slot 4 and 5. Slot 4 is used if there is only one SVCE Board. - Modem and Interface Baseband Boards: These boards are placed in Slot 21 to 6 in the Connection-Panel. Boards are placed from left to right (starting with Slot 21) according to their associated channel number in this order: Ch.P - Ch.1 Ch.N. For Terminal systems, the Modem Boards are always placed to the left of the corresponding Interface Baseband Boards. The following table shows the placement of Modem- and Interface Baseband- Boards for different channel arrangements (I=Interface Baseband Board, M=Modem Board, X=Transceiver Units) Transceiver Sub-racks: A Transceiver Sub-rack can contain up to 4 Transceiver Units. - If there are 4 or less Transceiver Units in the system, one Transceiver Sub-rack is used and is always placed above the Baseband Sub-rack. For single polarization systems the branching is always inserted from the left side of the sub-rack. For Dual polarization systems, branching is inserted at both sides of the sub-rack. The Transceiver Units are placed from their associated branching, according to their associated channel number in this order: Ch.P Ch.1 Ch.N.
B4017
149
InterLink
- If there are more than 4 Transceiver Units in the system, two Transceiver Sub-racks are used, where one is placed above and one is placed below the Baseband Sub-rack. In the upper Transceiver Sub-rack, the branching is always inserted from the left side. In the lower Transceiver Sub-rack, the branching is always inserted from the right side. The Transceiver Units are placed from their associated branching, according to their associated channel number in this order: Ch.P Ch.1 Ch.N. Since there can only be 4 Transceiver Units connected to each branching, the system can have maximum 4 channels on each polarization. Auxiliary Sub-rack: This sub-rack may contain up to 8 Power Filtering Boards. There is normally one Power Filtering Board for each Transceiver Unit. Power Filtering boards are placed according to the position of the corresponding Transceiver Units: - The Power Filtering Boards for Transceiver Units in the upper Transceiver Sub-rack are placed in slot 1 to slot 4 in the Auxiliary Sub-rack. - The Power Filtering Boards for Transceiver Units in the lower Transceiver Sub-rack are placed in slot 5 to slot 8 in the Auxiliary Sub-rack.
6\VWHP %DVHEDQG6XEUDFNVORWSRVLWLRQV &RQILJXUDWLRQ ([DPSOHV/DUJHU 6\VWHPV
3+0 Terminal 3+1 Terminal 3+1 Terminal with LPT 7+1 Terminal 8+0 Terminal M1 I 1 M2 I 2 M3 I 3 MP M1 I 1 M2 I 2 M3 I 3 MP IP M1 I1 M2 I2 M3 I3
MP M1 I1 M2 I2 M3 I3 M4 I4 M5 I5 M6 I6 M7 I7 M1 I1 M2 I2 M3 I3 M4 I4 M5 I5 M6 I6 M7 I7 M8 I8
150
B4017
Operators Guide
6\VWHP&RQILJXUDWLRQ([DPSOHV 8SSHU;&95 /RZHU $X[LOLDU\6XEUDFNVORW 6XEUDFNVORW ;&956XE SRVLWLRQV /DUJHU6\VWHPV SRVLWLRQV UDFNVORW SRVLWLRQV
2+1 Terminal (single polarization) 2+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=2, WG.right=1) 3+1 Terminal (single polarization) 3+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=2, WG.right=2) 4+0 Terminal (single polarization) 4+0 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=3, WG.right=1) 4+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=3, WG.right=2) 6+0 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=3, WG.right=3) 6+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=4, WG.right=3) 7+1 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=4, WG.right=4) 8+0 Terminal (dual polarization: WG.left=4, WG.right=4) XP X1 X2 XP X1 X2 XP X1 X2 X 3 XP X1 X3 X 2 X1 X2 X3 X 4 X1 X2 X3 X 4 XP X1 X2 X1 X2 X3 XP X1 X2 X 3 P P P1 P 2 P P P1 P2 P P P1 P 2 P 3 P P P1 P 3 P 2 P 1 P2 P 3 P 4 P 1 P2 P 3 P 4 X4 X3 P P P1 P 2 X6 X5 X4 P 1 P2 P 3 X6 X5 X4 P P P1 P 2 P 3 P 4 P3 P6 P 5 P4 P6 P 5 P4
XP X1 X2 X 3 X 7 X6 X5 X4 P P P1 P 2 P 3 P7 P6 P 5 P4 X1 X2 X3 X 4 X 8 X7 X6 X5 P 1 P2 P 3 P 4 P8 P7 P 6 P5
Example of a 1+1 Terminal without LPT with the Connection Panel in the right position within the sub-rack:
10
INTFC A
9
INTFC A
8
INTFC A
7
INTFC A
6
INTFC A
5
INTFC A
4
INTFC A
0
A
3 2 1
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INTFC B
INPUT OU TPU T
INPUT OUTPU T
INPUT OU TPUT
INPUT OU TPU T
INPUT OU TPU T
INPUT OU TPUT
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OU TPU T
INTFC C
INPUT OUTPU T
WARN ING POWER
WARN ING POWER
PWR ON
OFF
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
509 567
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
INTERFACE BASEBAND BD MODEM BD
GND
SVCE BD

+ GND
MODEM BD
+
SUPERVISORY BD
J2 (SU TEST)
S1
ON 1 2
J1 (EXT CON)
- GND + -
GND
2.1.1.1.4
Unit Housekeeping Wizard

NEW provides a wizard for displaying and setting the system configuration. A dynamic preview window presents the system configuration either physically or schematically. 151
B4017
InterLink
Step 1:
Step 1 controls: Selects the basic system configuration. Subrack system: - Smaller Systems: Systems using the Baseband Subrack for Smaller Systems and up to one Transceiver Sub-rack - Larger Systems: Systems using the Baseband Subrack for Larger Systems and one or two Transceiver Sub-racks Terminal type: - Terminal: Channels are arranged for one antenna direction - Double terminal: Channels are arranged for two antenna directions. Not supported in R7D00. Transmission system: - SDH - Sonet
152
B4017
Operators Guide
Step 2:
Step 2 controls: Selects the channel arrangements and boards. Regular channels: The number of regular channels. Possible values: 1..8. Protection channels: The number of protection channels. Possible values: 0 or 1. Dual polarization: Whether to use single or dual polarization. If dual polarization is selected, the number of channels that uses the polarization associated with the left and right waveguide branching can be selected. Maximum 4 channels can be assigned to each polarization. If the number of channels on each polarization is different, the majority shall always be associated with the left waveguide branching. LPT on protection channel: Whether to use an Interface Baseband Board for the protection channel. This channel can then be used for Low Priority Traffic on the protection channel when no other channels are using protection. Hot stand-by: Whether a 2+0 system is configured as HSB. Dual baseband: Whether a HSB system perform RX switching. In a Dual baseband HSB system there are two Interface Baseband Boards while in a regular HSB system there are one Interface Baseband Board. Position of connection panel within the sub-rack: In Smaller Systems the connection panel can be mounted at three different positions. In single polarization systems the connection panel can be placed on the left or right side. In dual polarization systems the connection panel must be placed in the centre of the Sub-rack.
B4017
153
InterLink
Step 3:
Step 3 controls: Selects additional boards/units. SVCE Boards: Number of SVCE boards. Possible values: 0, 1 and 2. Placed from right to left in slot 4 and 5 (left of Supervisory Board). Power filtering boards: The number and placement of Power Filtering Boards in the Baseband Sub-rack and in the Auxiliary Sub-rack.
154
B4017
Operators Guide
Step 4:
Step 4 controls: List of all board/unit types created by the selections in the previous steps. Different variants of the board/unit types can be selected by either double-clicking in the list or by double-clicking on the board/unit in the preview window.
B4017
155
InterLink 2.1.1.1.5 System Change Detected

The System Change Detected dialogue box is automatically displayed when the Supervisory Board generates a NEED-CONFIG alarm (only if NEW is connected to the NE directly through the LCT port). The NEEDCONFIG alarm is generated if: The Supervisory Unit contains incomplete system configuration data. The Supervisory Board has been moved from another Sub-rack. If the Replace Unit Wizard is used in the replace process, this dialogue will not be displayed.
Dialogue controls: OK button: Performs the action specified by the selected radio button and then closes this dialogue box. Use Unit Housekeeping Wizard to set system configuration: Launches the Unit Housekeeping Wizard where the system configuration can be set. Configuration Download button: Starts the process of downloading configuration from file.
2.1.1.1.6
New Board Detected

The New Board Detected dialogue box is displayed from the New Board Wizard configuration context menu when the boards NEW BOARD DETECTED alarm is active. This alarm is generated by the SU on behalf of the board when the board type detected in the specific slot position is different from the system configuration in the SU.
156
B4017
Operators Guide
Dialogue controls: Unit Housekeeping Wizard button: Launches the Unit Housekeeping Wizard where the system configuration can be set. This button is visible if a change to this new board type does not affect the existing system configuration. Accept New Board button: Sends a message to the SU telling that the new board type is OK. This button is visible if the new board type conflicts with the existing system configuration. Cancel: Closes the dialogue box.
2.1.1.1.7
Replacing Boards/Units:
The Supervisory Board keeps a copy of the configuration and SW on the different boards/units. If a board/unit is replaced, the configuration and SW will be automatically downloaded from the Supervisory Board to the new Board/Unit. Replacement procedures: Transceiver Unit, Modem Board, Interface Baseband Board, SVCE Board: - Press the board/units Reset button for at least 2 seconds but less than 5 seconds. The UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm is generated and the board/units alarm LED starts blinking. - Replace the board/unit. - The Supervisory Board automatically starts downloading configuration data to the new board/unit. If the SW version of the new board/unit differs from the corresponding active SW component on the Supervisory Board the SW component is downloaded to the new board/unit (a DOWNLOAD-IN-PROGRESS alarm is generated on the board/unit).
B4017
157
InterLink
Supervisory Board: Start the Replace Unit Wizard from the Configuration menu on the SU Board node. This wizard guides you through the steps of copying the configuration data from the replaced/old Supervisory Board to the replacement/new Supervisory Board. The NE must be directly connected to a serial port in NEW in order to copy the configuration: - Step 1: Introduction - Step 2: Detects whether NEW is connected directly through a serial port to NE where the Supervisory Board is to be replaced. Also retrieves Element ID data from the old Supervisory Board. - Step 3: Uploads configuration data from the old Supervisory board. - Step 4: Activates the UNIT-BEING-REPLACED alarm on the Supervisory Board. The boards alarm LED starts blinking. The board can now be replaced. - Step 5: When the board has been replaced and the new Supervisory Board SW has booted, this step detects the new Supervisory Board on the serial port. - Step 6: Copies Element ID data to the new Supervisory Board. - Step 7: Downloads configuration data to the new Supervisory Board. The replacement process is now finished.
2.1.1.2
Element ID
The Element ID property sheet displays/configures the identification data for the Network Element.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Note that the SU will be rebooted if any settings have been changed. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
158
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: NE type: The type of Network Element (product family). Factory preset (not changeable). Name: The name of the Network Element (Max. 32 characters). Section address: The section address of the Network Element. (1-128) NE address: The Network Element address (1-62). Used to identify Network Elements within a section. MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the Network Element. Factory preset (not changeable). Six bytes in hex format delimited by colon. NSAP address: The Network Service Access Point address of the Network Element, used for OSI-Management. Up to 20 bytes in hex format delimited by colon. IP address: The Internet Protocol address of the Network Element. Four bytes in decimal format delimited by period. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Section and NE addressing: The combination of Section and NE address uniquely identifies the NE within a network. This addressing notation was introduced in other Nera radio-relay product families and is maintained in the InterLink NEs for network compatibility reasons. The Section term is used for a combination of equipment that forms a switching section. It is a relay with Terminals (T) at both ends and none or more Repeaters (R) in between. The Section address then identifies the Section while the NE address identifies the NE within the Section. The figure below shows a typical Nera Management Network:
In a InterLink NE the only address requirement is that the combination of the Section and NE address forms a unique address within the network.
B4017
159
InterLink 2.1.1.3 Available Functions

Some functions are optional. The optional functions can be ordered from your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used for making functions available. The Available Functions property sheet is used for displaying/configuring availability of optional functions. To make new functions available, press the Set button and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the authentication string.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue box. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: The check-boxes are only for display purposes. To modify available functions, press the property sheets Set button and enter the authentication string. Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC): When checked, ATPC is available on all transceiver units. ATPC is a function for effectively reducing interference probabilities. Note that ATPC must be available on both sides of the hop in order to be used. ATPC is configured from the RF Power property sheet on the XCVR nodes. IP stack: When checked, network management is available through TCP/IP. The IP address is configured from the Element ID property sheet, and other IP settings and IP Tunnelling can be configured in the Communication Ports property sheet. 160
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.1.4 Notifications

The NE can send notifications to NEW when specific events occur. When using notifications, NEW gets new information faster than if only polling is used. Polling should however be used in addition to notifications. The NE keeps individual notification settings for each NEW that is logged on to the NE, such that the settings made from one NEW only apply to that NEW. Please note that the settings will be reset to default when NEW logs on to the NE or if the supervisory board is reset. All notifications are enabled by default. The Notifications property sheet displays/configures enabling of notifications.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
B4017
161
InterLink
Property page controls: Events: - Alarm: When checked, the NE sends notifications every time an alarm is raised or cleared. (The appropriate alarm severity check-box must also be checked.) - Security: When checked, the NE sends notifications each time a configuration setting or security action is made by any NEW-NMS. Alarm severities: When checked, the NE sends notifications every time an alarm of the same severity level is raised or cleared. (The Alarm Event check-box must also be checked). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.1.5
NE Clock
A real-time clock is used by the NE to set timestamps on alarm and security events. This clock is also used for managing the collection and calculation of performance measurements. NEW-NMS also provides a function for regularly automatically synchronising all detected NEs. See NEW-NMS User Manual. The NE Clock property sheet displays/configures the NEs clock. Press the Set button to synchronise the NE clock with the PCs clock. Note that the NE uses GMT time while the time presented in NEW-NMS is converted to your PCs local time.
162
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the PCs clock settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: The NEs clock: The current date and time of the NE. Difference from NEW (your PC): The time difference in seconds between your PC and the NE. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
163
InterLink 2.1.1.6 Configuration Upload

Uploads configuration data from a NE. The uploaded data can be stored in a file and/or be downloaded to other NEs immediately. System configuration (as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and configuration parameters for the different boards/units in the system are included in the uploaded configuration data, but not Element ID data. If several Network Elements shall be configured equally (except from name and addresses), just configure one of them and copy the configuration data to the others. It is also a good idea to upload and save configuration data to a file when installation and configuration of the NE is completed. It is then easy to recover the configuration of the NE if any configuration parameters are accidentally changed or if the Supervisory Board has been replaced. To upload configuration data, select the Upload Configuration menu command on the NE node. A Configuration Upload progress dialogue box is then displayed.
If upload is aborted due to message error or timeout, or if the upload process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to Close and the message info symbol stops rotating. Dialogue box controls: Cancel: Stops the configuration upload process and closes the dialogue box. Close: Closes the dialogue box. When Configuration Upload is completed, an Upload Complete dialogue box is displayed where the user can save the uploaded data to a file or download the data to other NEs. 164
B4017
Operators Guide
Dialogue box controls: Save: Displays a File Save dialogue box where the uploaded data can be saved to a file. Download: Displays a NE selection dialogue box where the user can select which NEs to download the uploaded data to. Close: Closes the dialogue box. If the user selects the Download button, a Download dialogue box is displayed where the user can select one or more NEs to download the data to.
Dialogue box controls: NE list: Displays all NEs that this data can be downloaded to. Download: Starts the download process for all NEs selected in the list. Close: Closes the dialogue box.
B4017
165
InterLink 2.1.1.7 Configuration Download

Downloads configuration data from a file to the NE. System configuration (as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and configuration parameters for the different boards/units in the system are included in the configuration data, but not Element ID data. To download configuration data, select the Download Configuration menu command on the NE node. A File Open dialogue box is then displayed where a configuration file (*.cfg) can be selected.
When a configuration file is selected and opened the download process starts and a Configuration Download progress dialogue box is displayed.
When download is aborted due to message error or timeout, or when the download process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to Close, and the message info symbol stops rotating. Dialogue box controls: Cancel: Stops the configuration download process and closes the dialogue box. Close: Closes the dialogue box. 166
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.1.8 Restore Configuration

Restores the configuration parameters for the boards/units in the system to factory defaults. System configuration (as set by the Unit Housekeeping Wizard) and Element ID data are not affected by this action. To restore configuration data, select the Restore Configuration menu command on the NE node. A message box is then displayed giving the user the opportunity to abort the process.
2.1.1.9
SW Versions
The SU stores SW components used by different boards/units in a nonvolatile FLASH memory. Two memory banks are allocated for each component (except Boot and PLD components). This makes it possible to download SW to one bank while the other bank is being executed (active). SW may be downloaded from NEW to several different NEs simultaneously, but only one SW component can be downloaded to each NE at the same time. All units/boards of the same type share the same software component. The SU also makes sure that the equal boards are executing the same version of the SW. During the boot process of the different boards/units, the SU checks that the board/unit contains the right version of its application SW component. It is possible to manually initiate the download process of application code between the SU and selected boards/units. The SW Versions property sheet displays the current status of the SW components stored in the SU and the status of the application code running on the different boards/units.
B4017
167
InterLink 2.1.1.9.1 Supervisory Board

The Supervisory Board property page displays the SW components stored in FLASH memory on the Supervisory Board.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: List: Displays information about SW components stored in the SU. - Board/Unit Type: The type of the board/unit where the SW component is used. - SW Component: The name of the component. This name is provided by the *.bin file when the component is being downloaded. This name describes the board/unit that it applies to. For empty memory banks the SW component text is (empty SW bank). - Bank: The name of the allocated memory bank. - Rev.: The version of the component. - Build Time: The date and time when the SW component was created. - Status: The current status of the component: Invalid: The SW component is corrupt or missing. Idle: The SW component is valid but not executed. Can be activated using the Set Active button. Active: The SW component is currently executed. 168
B4017
Operators Guide
Erasing Flash: A download process has just been started. The old component is being erased. Downloading: A download process is running. This status may be maintained a short period after a download process has been aborted. Set active button: Makes the processor run code from the selected SW bank. When switching active bank the boards/units are also rebooted. Broadcast button: Initiates a parallel download of SW components from the selected bank in the SU to all the boards/units using the component. (This button only applies to application code for boards/units, except the SU application code). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.1.9.2
Board/Unit
The Board/Unit property page displays the status of the running application code on the different boards/units (except from the Supervisory Board), and the status of download processes from the SU to the different board/units. (This property page is available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00)
Property page controls: List: Displays information about SW components stored in the SU. - Board/Unit: The name of the Board/Unit.
B4017
169
InterLink
- SW Component: The name of the component. This name is provided by the *.bin file when the component is being downloaded. This name describes the board/unit that it applies to. For empty memory banks the SW component text is (empty SW bank). - Rev.: The version of the component. - Build Time: The date and time when the SW component was created. - Status: The current status of the component: Unknown: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with the board/ unit. This status will also be present a short time after reboot of the Supervisory Board. Download Queued...: A download process has been initiated for this board/unit and will be executed as soon as the other download processes have been completed. Erasing Flash...: A download process has just been started. The old component is being erased. Downloading from SU...: A download process is being executed Download Completed: The download process has just been completed. This status is only displayed for some seconds before the status is changed to "running". Download failed: The download process failed. Running: The SW component is running. This is the normal situation. SW revision mismatch with active bank in SU: The revision of the SW component being executed at the board/unit is different from the "active" SW component at the SU. (A download process will be automatically executed if the board/unit is rebooted). Message Timeout: NEW-NMS has lost contact with the NE. Download button: Initiates SW download from the corresponding active bank in the SU to the selected boards/units in the list. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
170
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.1.10 SW Download

SW components for the different boards/units in the system can be downloaded from NEW to a nonvolatile FLASH memory in the SU. For description on how the SU manages the SW components for the different boards/units in the system, see the SW Versions chapter 2.1.1.9. To download SW, select the Download SW menu command on the NE node. A File Open dialogue box is then displayed.
When a SW file is selected in the File Open dialogue box, a new dialogue box pops up that displays information about the SW component.
Start Download: Starts the download process to the SU. Cancel: Closes the dialogue box. Help: Displays help for this dialogue box.
B4017
171
InterLink
If Start download button is pressed the download process starts, and a download progress dialogue pops up.
If download is aborted due to message error or timeout, or when the download process is completed, the Cancel button changes name to Close and the message info symbol stops rotating. Note that if the download process is aborted, you have to wait until the NE is ready for a new download. Dialogue box controls: Cancel: Stops the configuration download process and closes the dialogue box. Close: Closes the dialogue box. When download is completed a message box is displayed where the user can choose whether to start the new SW component or continue executing the old component.
172
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.1.11 Remote Reset

If the NE doesnt respond to management commands (Even though the NEs communication ports are correctly configured), there is a way to remotely reboot the SU. The SU can be rebooted by the NE across the hop by inserting a remote reset request into the main traffic. Note that resetting the SU does not influence the traffic.
Dialogue box controls: Remote NE: Select which NE to reset. The Combo box contains the name of the NE(s) connected to this NE through DCC Radio. For double terminals there will be two NEs to select from. (If a NE across the hop is not detected by NEW-NMS, the name of the NE is presented as Unknown NE. Reset button: Resets the selected NE.. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box Help Button: Displays help for the dialogue box.
B4017
173
InterLink 2.1.2 Equipment Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Equipment node.
Menu text NNP Routing IP Routing Communication Ports Antenna Frequency Looping OSI Settings
&RQWH[WPHQX
Description Displays the NNP Routing property sheet Displays the IP Routing property sheet Displays the Communication Ports property sheet Displays the Antenna property sheet Displays the Frequency property sheet Displays the Looping dialog box Displays the OSI Settings property sheet
2.1.2.1
NNP Routing
The active and initial routing tables map incoming messages that are addressed to other NEs, to different communication ports. The active routing table is used by the SU to route messages to other NEs, using the best path detected. The SU regularly searches for connected NEs through all enabled communication ports to detect any changes in the network topology. This table is initialised with the initial routing entries when the SU is rebooted (and when the initial routing table is configured by the user) and then evolves towards an optimal routing table. The initial routing table is used after the SU has been booted. This table is used as a starting point for the routing mechanism, and will thus, if properly set, decrease the time the NE uses to create a sufficient active routing table. Initial routing entries can be manually added and active routing entries can be copied to the initial table. Active Routing property page:
174
B4017
Operators Guide
Initial Routing property page:
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element (Static Routing only). Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: List: Contains routing entries. - Auto/Manual: If Auto, the router may update the entry in the active routing table automatically based on shortest path/lowest weight. If Manual, the entry is never changed by the router and fixed route configuration is used. - Section: The Section address of the destination NE. Possible values: 1...128. - NE: The NE address of the destination NE. If this number is 255, section routing is used. That means that this routing entry is used for all NEs in the specified section. Possible values: 1...62 (and broadcast address 255).
B4017
175
InterLink
- Port: The communication port of which the messages are to be routed through. Possible values: NI1 NI2 DCC line 1 DCC line 2 DCC line 3 DCC radio (dir1) DCC radio (dir2) OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Server) OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Server) OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Client) OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Client) TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Server) TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Server) TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Client) TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Client) - Weight: A computed weight that gives an indication of the communication capacity to the destination network element. A high number denotes a longer response time. Add button: Displays the Add Routing Entry dialogue box where a new initial routing entry can be configured. Edit button: Displays the Edit Routing Entry dialogue box where the selected initial routing entry can be configured. Delete button: Deletes the selected routing entries. Add to initial button: Copies the selected routing entries to the initial routing table. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
The Add Routing Entry and Edit Routing Entry dialogue boxes are similar. The only difference is that one adds a new entry to the initial routing table, while the other edits an existing routing entry.
176
B4017
Operators Guide
Dialogue controls: Section routing: This routing entry is used for all NEs in the specified section. (NE address is set to the broadcast address 255). Individual routing: This routing entry is only used for NE specified by the Section and NE address. For all other controls, see the description of the list columns in the property page description.
B4017
177
InterLink 2.1.2.2 2.1.2.2.1 IP Routing General Settings

The general settings page allows the user to control the general use of the OSPF and RIP 2 protocols for the selected NE. Enabling of protocols on specific interfaces are performed in the Rip Interfaces and OSPF Interfaces property pages.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet. Help button: Displays help for active page.
178
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: Enable Protocol: Select routing protocol(s) available to the interfaces on current NE. - RIP: Allow use of RIP v2 - OSPF: Allow use of OSPF Export to...: The Export to... options allow the routing information to be passed to the different protocols. For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP protocols, the current NE must have both protocols enabled. Routing information regarding static routes may always be passed to enabled protocol(s). Default metric: The values entered in these controls set the default metric used for the different protocols. IP Configurable Interfaces: List of interfaces available on the current NE for the OSPF and RIP protocols. Interfaces may be enabled for IP in the Communication Ports page for the specific interface (e.g. NI interface on CityLink).
2.1.2.2.2
Active Routes
Monitor active routes for current NE from this page.
B4017
179
InterLink
2.1.2.2.3
Static Routes
Edit static routes regarding IP Routing using this page.
180
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet. Help button: Displays help for active page. Property page controls: Add: Add a new static route to the list using the appearing dialogue. Edit: Select a row and press "Edit" to open the "Edit Static Route" dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the selected route may be changed. Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list. Note! Changes to the static routes are not transferred to the NE before "Set" is pressed. Route States The static routes have three possible states; Active Invalid Unreachable In order to indicate the state of each route, a colour scheme has been applied. Each static route in the list has a font colour according to its state. The table below shows the relation between the different font colours used and the static route states.
6WDWH
Active Invalid Unreachable
)RQWFRORU
black red blue
2.1.2.2.3.1 "Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues

The "Add Static Route" and "Edit Static Route" dialogues may be opened from the "Static Routes" page. The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue adds new static routes and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing static routes. A maximum of 20 static routes are allowed for each NE.
B4017
181
InterLink
Dialogue controls: Destination: IP address of the destination for current static route. Note! The IP address must be valid for the given subnet mask entered below. Mask: Subnet mask for current static route. Note! The subnet mask must be continuous. Gateway: IP address of the gateway through which the current static route may be reached. Interface Id: Interface used by the static route. Metric: Interface metric. Possible values: 0 - 15.
2.1.2.2.4
Note!
RIP Interfaces
Edit RIP Interfaces for current NE from this page. In order to edit the "RIP areas" settings, the RIP protocol must be disabled in the General Settings page.
182
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet. Help button: Displays help for active page. Property page controls: Add: Add a new RIP interface to the list using the appearing dialogue. Edit: Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit RIP Interface dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the selected interface may be changed. Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list. Note! Changes to the RIP interfaces are not transferred to the NE before Set is pressed.
B4017
183
InterLink 2.1.2.2.4.1 "Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues
The "Add RIP Interface" and "Edit RIP Interface" dialogues may be opened from the "RIP Interfaces" page. The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue adds new RIP interfaces and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing RIP interfaces. A maximum of 8 interfaces are allowed for each NE.
Dialogue controls: Interface Id: Id of an interface which handles RIP protocol traffic. Metric: Interface metric. Possible values: 0 - 15. Default Route Metric: Metric assigned to imported default route. 0 = No default gateway. Possible values: 0 - 15.
184
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.2.2.5

Note!
IP Routing - OSPF Interfaces

Edit OSPF Interfaces for current NE from this page. In order to edit the OSPF areas settings, the OSPF protocol must be disabled in the General Settings page.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet. Help button: Displays help for active page. Property page controls: Add: Add a new OSPF interface to the list using the appearing dialogue. Edit: Select a row and press Edit to open the Edit OSPF Interface dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the selected interface may be changed. Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list. Note!
B4017
Changes to the OSPF interfaces are not transferred to the NE before Set is pressed. 185
InterLink 2.1.2.2.5.1 "Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues
The "Add OSPF Interface" and "Edit OSPF Interface" dialogues may be opened from the "OSPF Interfaces" page. The dialogues are identical, but are handled differently; the "Add" dialogue adds new OSPF interfaces and the "Edit" dialogue edits existing OSPF interfaces. A maximum of 8 interfaces are allowed for each NE.
Dialogue controls: Interface Id: Id of an interface which handles OSPF protocol traffic. Cost: An indication of the overhead required to send packets across current interface. - Possible values: 0 - 4294967295. Transmit Delay: The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a Link State Update Packet over current interface. - Default value is 1 second. - Possible values: 1 - 4294967295. Area Id: Identifies the OSPF area the current interface is part of. Designated Router Priority: Indicates the current NEs reliability as a designated router (DR). Higher values = higher reliability. - 0 = cannot be DR. - Possible values: 0 - 4294967295.
186
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.2.2.6

Note!
OSPF Areas
Edit settings for OSPF areas for current NE from this page. In order to edit the OSPF areas settings, the OSPF protocol must be disabled in the General Settings page.
B4017
187
InterLink
Property page controls: Add:Add a new OSPF area to the list using the appearing dialogue. Note! Use "Edit" dialogue to add new network ranges to existing areas. Edit:Select a row and press "Edit" to open the "Edit OSPF Area" dialogue. In this dialogue the settings for the area which the row belongs to may be changed. Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list. If a network range row is selected, only the network range is deleted. In all other cases, the entire area is deleted. Note! Changes to the OSPF areas are not transferred to the NE before Set is pressed.
2.1.2.2.6.1 "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues

The "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues may be opened from the "OSPF Areas" page. The dialogues are almost identical, but are handled differently. The main differences are as follows: "Add OSPF Area" Add new areas Add network ranges to new areas "Edit OSPF Area" Edit existing areas Add network ranges to existing areas A maximum of 4 areas are allowed for each NE.
188
B4017
Operators Guide
Dialogue controls: Area Id: Identifies the current area. Cost: Default cost for the current area. Possible values: 0 - 4294967295. Stub Area: When this checkbox is set, the current area is configured as a stub network. Add: Opens the "Add OSPF Area Network Range" dialogue. Allows the user to add new network ranges to the current area. Edit: Opens the "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogue. Allows the user to edit existing network ranges for the current area. Delete: Deletes the selected network range(s) from the list.
2.1.2.2.6.2 "Add OSPF Area Network Range" and "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogues
The "Add OSPF Area Network Range" and "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" dialogues may be opened from the "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues. The network range dialogues are handled similarly to the "Add OSPF Area" and "Edit OSPF Area" dialogues: "Add OSPF Area Network Range" Add new network range to current area "Edit OSPF Area Network Range" Edit existing network range in current area A maximum of 8 network ranges are allowed for each OSPF area.
B4017
189
InterLink
Dialogue controls: IP Network Address: Enter the IP network address. Note! The IP network address must be valid for the given network mask entered below. Mask: Enter the network mask. Note! The network mask must be continuous. Advertise: When this checkbox is set, the information regarding this network range is advertised. Range Cost: An indication of the overhead required to send packets across the current network range. Possible values: 0 - 4294967295.
190
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.2.3 Communication Ports

The communication ports are different interfaces for interconnecting different NEs to form a management network. The communication ports also include interfaces for LCT. Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page DCC Property Page: The DCC ports are used to interconnect Network Elements through the SOH of the SDH traffic. In the Line direction up to three different management communication channels can be used while one DCC channel can be used for each Radio direction.
B4017
191
InterLink
Property page controls: Enabled: If checked, the DCC port is enabled (management traffic is inserted into the SOH of the traffic). Always enabled in Radio direction(s). Channel: The traffic channel where the DCC is inserted. The value range is limited by the system configuration: - Line directions: P, 1N, where N is the number of regular channels. Ch.P is only selectable if LPT is present in the selected direction. - Radio directions: P and 1. Direction: The traffic direction where the DCC is inserted. The value range is limited by the system configuration. For DCC Line, the direction is only selectable when the channel is a double terminal where the user may select Line (dir1) or Line (dir2). SOH byte: The SOH byte used for this DCC. If pressing the SOH button, a SOH byte Selection dialogue box is displayed. Stack: Which communication protocol to use: - Nera: Proprietary. Always enabled in Radio direction(s). - QECC: QECC Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00). LAPD is the data link layer of the QECC protocol. For more information refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-T Q.921. User Side: Client for the LAPD requests. Network Side: Server for the LAPD requests. - TCP/IP: TCP/IP Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00). NI Property Page: The NI ports are used to interconnect Network Elements through electrical cables. The NI ports can also be used to connect to a LCT (Function=Q1 V.11 and a RS422/V.11 to RS232C/V.24 converter must be used).
192
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: Enabled: If checked, the NI port is enabled. Function: Various functions are available to connect this NE to different interfaces of other NEs (or LCT). Possible selections: - CityLink/InterLink: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 64000, 115200, 200000. - NL29x NI: Available baud rate: 200000. Nera stack only. - NL29x Qx: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 64000. Nera stack only. - PDH synchronous: Available baud rate: 9600. Nera stack only. - PDH asynchronous: Available baud rates: 1200 and 9600. Nera stack only. - V.11 contra dir slave: Receiving clock signal. - V.11 contra dir master: Sending clock signal. - Q1 V.11: Available baud rates: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200, 200000. Nera stack only. - NL29x V.11 contra dir slave: Receiving clock signal. Nera stack only. Baud rate: The number of bits transferred per second. Selectable values depend on selected function.
B4017
193
InterLink
Stack: Which communication protocol to use: - Nera: Proprietary. - QECC: QECC Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00). LAPD is the data link layer of the QECC protocol. For more information refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-T Q.921. User Side: Client for the LAPD requests. Network Side: Server for the LAPD requests. - TCP/IP: TCP/IP Stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00). LCT Property Page: The LCT ports are used to connect the NE to a NEW-NMS through a null modem cable. There are two connection ports for serial communication: LCT port on the Connection Panel. LCT port on the Alarm Display & Relay Board. Only the baud rate is configurable. The other port settings are fixed: Data bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Flow control: None
194
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: Baud rate: The number of bits transferred per second. Possible Values: 1200, 9600, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200. Ethernet Property Page: The internal Ethernet adapter is used to connect the NE to a LAN/WAN network.
Property page controls: Enabled: When checked, the Ethernet adapter is enabled. Note that an IP or NSAP address must be configured before the Ethernet port can be used. [See the Element ID property page]. Stack: - TCP/IP: IP address must be configured in the Element ID property sheet before this stack can be used. - OSI TP4: OSI stack (Available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00).
B4017
195
InterLink
IP Settings Property Page: Subnet mask and default gateway for the Internet Protocol can be configured in the IP Settings property sheet. The IP address can be set in the Element ID property sheet.
Property page controls: IP address: The IP address of this NE. Use the Element ID property sheet to configure this address. Subnet mask: This number, combined with the IP address, identifies which network your Network Element is on. The Subnet Mask number should be provided by your network administrator. Default gateway: This address is required for nodes on inter-networks. It is used by the Ethernet adapter to forward packets to other networks or subnets. If this address is not provided, IP functionality will be limited to the local subnet unless a route is specified with the TCP/IP route command. The Default Gateway address should be provided by the network administrator.
196
B4017
Operators Guide
TCP/IP Tunnelling Property Page: A connection can be set up between two Network Elements, through another network, using the Internet Protocol. This is called IP Tunnelling. Two connections, IP Tunnel 1 and IP Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must be enabled with TCP/IP Stack in order to use IP tunnels. The IP tunnel must only be configured at one side of the tunnel, the client side. The other side will then be the server side.
Property page controls: Enabled: When checked, IP tunnelling is enabled. Remote section address: The section address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by the NE. Remote NE address: The NE address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by the NE. Remote IP address: The IP address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel.
B4017
197
InterLink
OSI Tunnelling Property Page: A connection can be set up between two Network Elements, through another network, using the OSI Protocol. This is called OSI TP4 Tunnelling. Two connections, OSI TP4 Tunnel 1 and OSI TP4 Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must be enabled with OSI TP4 Stack in order to use OSI TP4 tunnels. The OSI TP4 tunnel must only be configured at one side of the tunnel, the client side. The other side will then be the server side.
Property page controls: Enabled: When checked, OSI TP4 tunnelling is enabled. Remote section address: The section address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by the NE. Remote NE address: The NE address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel. This number will be automatically detected by the NE. Remote NSAP address: The NSAP address of the Network Element on the other side of the tunnel.
198
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.2.4 Antenna

The antenna property sheet displays antenna parameters that are stored in the NE. These parameters must be initially configured from NEW. (The parameters cannot be read from the hardware.). To change the antenna parameters, select a different Antenna code from the combo box. Available antenna codes and their parameters are stored in a table in your database. If your antenna code cannot be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database table.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: Antenna code: Uniquely identifies the antenna type. Gain: The antenna gain. A measurement of the antennas ability to transform electrical signals to electromagnetic waves. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. Polarization: Single or double. Front/Back ratio: Ratio between the Gain in forward direction and Gain in backward direction. Frequency range: The frequency range where the antenna can be expected to operate successfully. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
199
InterLink 2.1.2.5 Frequency

The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for all transceiver units in the same antenna direction. For system configurations that have two antenna directions, there are two menu commands (one for each antenna direction). Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored in a table in your database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database table. When frequency data is retrieved from the NE, the data are matched against frequency plans stored in your database system. If a match is found the appropriate frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can be selected from the combo box. To change the frequencies: 1 Select a frequency plan from the combo box. 2 Select the polarization system from the combo box. 3 For each STM-1 channel, select frequencies: 3.1 Select the channel in the Channel settings list. 3.2 Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan. The RX frequency is calculated from the TX frequency and the duplex distance. The selected frequency should be within the band of the corresponding TX and RX filter as displayed in the Channel settings list. 3.3 Appropriate TX and RX compensation filters will be automatically selected by NEW when the frequency is changed. This setting may be manually overrided by double-clicking in the TX or RX Compensation Filter column in the Channel settings list. 4 Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property sheet) 5 Examine the status column in the channel list: 5.1 If a Transceiver Unit needs DRO tuning, open the DRO Tuning property sheet on the corresponding Transceiver Unit node and follow the DRO Tuning procedures. 5.2 If a Transceiver Unit claims to have invalid branching filter, replace the branching filter. Frequency settings for individual transceivers can also be displayed from the Frequency menu command on the XMTR Unit node.
200
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: Selected plan: The currently selected frequency plan. The graphical presentation of the plan contains channel buttons that can be used to set the RX and TX frequencies for the selected channel in the list. Red vertical lines show the RX and TX frequencies for the selected channel. Polarization system: The polarization settings of the system. This selection is used to determine appropriate compensation filter settings - ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternating Polarization): Neighbour channels are using opposite polarization. - ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization): Neighbour channels are using the same polarization. - CCDP (Co-Channel Dual Polarization): Two transceivers are using the same frequency but opposite polarization. Modulation: modulation method: 32TCM, 64TCM or 128 TCM. Data rate: STM-1 or STM-0. Channel spacing: The distance in MHz between two consecutive channels.
B4017
201
InterLink
Duplex distance: The distance between the Transmitter and Receiver frequencies. Innermost spacing: The distance between the highest frequency in lower half and the lowest frequency in the upper half of the frequency plan. Channel settings: - Channel: The number of the channel. - Status: Transceiver status: OK: Tuning and branching filters are OK. Need TX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the instructions. Need RX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the instructions. TX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter. RX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter. - TX: The Transmitter frequency. - RX: The Receiver frequency. - TX Compensation filter: Selection of TX compensation filter mode. The digital filters in the Modem Board compensates for RF Filter and branching characteristics. Different filter settings are stored in the database system for each frequency plan. (Possible selections are limited by the selected polarization system): ACAP Normal: The default filter for ACAP systems. No special consideration for innermost channels. ACAP Innermost: Innermost channels using the same polarization needs a different compensation-filtering due to low innermost spacing. ACCP/CCDP N: Narrow compensation filter used regardless of neighbour channels on the same polarization. ACCP/CCDP NNN: Narrow compensation filter used when there are neighbour channels on both sides (on the same polarization). ACCP/CCDP XNN: Narrow compensation filter used when there is a neighbour channel on the right side (on the same polarization). ACCP/CCDP NNX: Narrow compensation filter used when there is a neighbour channel on the left side (on the same polarization). ACCP/CCDP XNX: Narrow compensation filter used when there are no neighbour channels on any side (on the same polarization). ACCP/CCDP XWX: Wide compensation filter used when there are no neighbour channels on any side (on the same polarization). - RX Compensation filter: Selection of RX compensation filter mode. (See description of TX compensation) - TX Filter: Centre frequency and bandwidth of the TX branching filter - RX Filter: Centre frequency and bandwidth of the RX branching filter - TX Band: The TX frequency band supported by the Transceiver. - RX Band: The RX frequency band supported by the Transceiver. - TX LO synth.: Last calibrated LO TX frequency. - RX LO synth.: Last calibrated LO RX frequency. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 202
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.2.6 Looping

Different looping functions are provided as a powerful tool for testing different system modules. Available Loops: Interface Board: - Baseband Line Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the line input/output circuitry. - Baseband Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board. - Baseband Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote element is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board, Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this element in addition to the hop and the remote element. Modem Board: - Modem Near End IF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface and Modem Board. - Modem Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote element is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the functionality of the Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this element and the remote element. Transceiver Unit: - Transceiver Near End RF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board, Modem Board and Transceiver Unit, including the RF circuitry on the Transceiver Unit. Branching and channel filters are not included in the loop. Note that this loop terminates the RF XMTR signal to the remote element. The Looping dialogue box displays main traffic loops for all channels in the NE. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop manually may not be possible). Only one main loop can be active for each channel at the same time. When activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active loops on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular loops. For protected systems (N+1 or HSB) status lines displays the traffic flow and the current switch status. The loops can also be displayed from the individual boards/unit nodes. This property sheet can be displayed by double clicking on the board/unit objects in this dialogue box. All loops are cleared if the Supervisory Board is reset. (The Remote Reset function can be used to clear the loops if NEW has lost contact with the NE)
B4017
203
InterLink
Dialogue box controls: Close button: Closes the dialogue box Help button: Displays help. Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop: - Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown. - Black: The loop is off (inactive) - Red: The loop is on (active) Loops will be automatically cleared after: Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating a loop. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 second interval) as long as this dialogue box is open.
204
B4017
Operators Guide
Loop Timer dialogue box: The Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed when activating a loop.
Clear all loops: Selects the time period that the loop will be active. OK button: Sends an activate loop request to the Network Element using the selected time period settings. Cancel button: Closes this dialogue box. The loop setting is aborted.
2.1.2.7
OSI Settings
The OSI configuration has to be set to get OSI-traffic on your LAN routed through the Nera-network. (OSI Settings are available from Supervisory Board application code version R2B00) Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
B4017
205
InterLink
Parameters Property Page: The Parameters property page displays/configures the OSI parameters for the different communication ports. (OSI stack must be enabled in the Communication Ports property sheet in order to be used for a specific port).
Property page controls: NSAP Address: - Area ID: Subnet address. - Host ID: End system address. - End Selector: Type of service. Always 01. IS link state send buffer state: Transmitted buffer length size of IS hellopackets (512-1492 bytes). (Applies to all channels). Parameters: - MTU Size: Maximum Transmission Unit size (512-1492 bytes). - Default Metric: Cost of path. - LAPD Role: Client/Server role. The two ends of a communications line must be configured with the opposite roles in order to communicate!. - OSI Enabled: If checked, OSI stack is enabled for the corresponding communication port. (See the Communication Ports property sheet). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
206
B4017
Operators Guide
Routing Table Property Page: The Routing property page displays the Host ID and Metric for all OSI routing entries.
Property page controls: List: Host ID: End system address. Metric: Cost of path. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
207
InterLink
Interface Information Property Page: The Interface Information property page displays a summary of the OSI settings for the different communication ports
Property page controls: List: Displays information of the communication ports where OSI stack is enabled - Id: Port identifier. - Interface Name: Name of the communication port - Media: Type of communication media. - Status: - MTU Size: Maximum Transmission Unit size (512-1492 bytes). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
208
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.3 Supervisory Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Supervisory Board node.
&RQWH[WPHQX
Menu text Switch Configuration Manual Switch Control Diagnose Production Data Description Displays the Switch Configuration property sheet Displays the Manual Switch Control property sheet Displays the Diagnose property sheet Displays the Production Data property sheet
2.1.3.1
Protection Switching
Radio Protection Switching (RPS) operations for N+1and Hot Stand-by systems are managed by a dedicated module on the Supervisory Board. This RPS module interacts with other system hardware resources to achieve automatic protection switch operations based on switch criteria inputs from the individual radio channels. This module also supports manually controlled switch operations and status reporting. The RPS functions can be configured and controlled by NEW.
2.1.3.1.1
Switch Section
N+1 system configurations define a single traffic direction over a single radio hop as a protection switch section (future configurations may include multiple-hop sections). A dedicated RF channel, denoted protection channel (Ch. P), serves as a backup for a number of traffic channels, denoted regular channels. The state of a regular channel is either regular or protected. A channel is in protected state when its traffic is carried over the hop by the protection RF channel, otherwise it is in regular state (the traffic is carried over the hop by its own dedicated RF channel). The RPS module in a N+1 switch section is based on a Master/Slave philosophy. The Master is located at the receive end of the hop, and has the overall responsibility for acquiring the necessary system status information and controlling how and when a protection switchover shall be executed. The Slave is located at the transmit side of the hop and will execute actions requested by the remote-end Master. A typical action requested is to set up the remote TX bridge for a specific channel. The remote TX bridge is the signal duplication route from the traffic input port of a regular channel to the Ch. P transmit path. The Master and Slave communicate over the hop through the RPS order-wire channel, using a SOH byte in the SOH frame (MS1 or MS2). Hot Stand-by system configurations implement local equipment protection within the network element (radio station). A protection switch section is then comprised of the duplicated transmit- and receive-equip-
B4017
209
InterLink
ment required to serve one antenna. This switch section is monitored and controlled by a single RPS module. The two equipment paths are identified as Ch. 1 and Ch. 2. The protection switch state is either Ch. 1 active or Ch. 2 active. Each traffic direction (transmit and receive) has its own set of switch criteria and its own physical switch arrangement. The system may be set up as Unidirectional (radio transmit switch and baseband receive switch operates completely independent of one another) or Bidirectional (radio transmit switch will follow the baseband receive switch if there is no conflicting criteria, and vice versa). Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband system configurations implements local equipment protection for the transmit traffic direction only. In this system configuration the received signal is duplicated through the entire equipment. (There is one Interface Baseband Board for each channel). Protection switching of the received signal must be performed by external equipment.
2.1.3.1.2
Switch Criteria
Automatic switch operations are initiated based on a set of switch criteria. Automatic switch criteria are individual or collections of alarms and indicators generated by the different boards/units within the switch section. The switch criteria are grouped into a Quality group and a Continuity group. The Quality type of criteria will request error-free (aligned) switchover while the Continuity type of criteria will request unconditional (forced) switchover. Quality criteria: Low RF input level (Low RF): Originates in the Transceiver Unit and indicates that the input signal level has fallen below a specific threshold. Early Warning (EW): Originates in the Modem board and indicates that the estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing) is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property sheet]. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Low BER (LBER): Originates in the Modem board and indicates that the estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing) is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property sheet]. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Continuity criteria: High BER (HBER): Originates in the Modem Board and indicates that the estimated error ratio (calculated by the demodulator signal processing) is above a specific threshold [See the BER Thresholds property sheet]. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations)
210
B4017
Operators Guide
Sync loss (OOS): Originates in the Modem Board and indicates that either the internal OOF alarm or the internal RF_ID alarm has been asserted. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Modem Board TX alarm: Indicates failure in the data signal connection between the Interface Baseband Board from which the data originates and the Modem Board, or in the input circuitry of the Modem Board. (N+1 system configurations only). Interface regular port input alarm: Originates in the Interface Baseband Board and serves as RX data input alarm for the regular input port. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Modem Board absent alarm: Empty slot is detected in the Modem Boards slot position. Interface Baseband Board absent alarm: Empty slot is detected in the Interface Baseband Boards slot position. In addition to switch criteria there are some equipment alarms related to the channels ability to serve traffic. If one or more of these alarms are raised the channel is not able to transmit/receive the signal even if it is protected, so no attempt will be made to protect it: Protectability criteria: Interface protection port input alarm: Originates in the Interface Baseband Board and serves as RX data input alarm for the input protection port. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Interface Baseband Board TX alarm: (N+1 system configurations only). - Terminal system configuration: Indicates missing input signal (tributary side). - Add/Drop Repeater system configuration: Indicates failure in the data signal connection between the Interface Baseband Board and the Modem board from which the data originates or in the input circuitry of the Interface Baseband Board. Some indicators are used in addition to the switch criteria to validate the switch operation: Indicators: Alignment indicator: Indicates that the data alignment function has detected identical data streams on the protection channel and regular channel, and is capable of doing an error-free (aligned) switchover. (N+1 system configurations only). Transceiver state indicator: Indicates whether a radio transmitter is active or passive (Hot Stand-by system configurations only).
B4017
211
InterLink 2.1.3.1.3 N+1 Systems

Switch system: 2+1 with LPT (Channel 2 is currently using protection)
Interface BB BD P
P P
Interface BB BD P
Modem BD
P
Transceiver
&K3
Transceiver
Modem BD
Out
P
Inp
P
&K3
Interface BB BD 1
R
1 1 1
Interface BB BD 1
R
Transceiver
Transceiver
Modem BD
&K
Modem BD
Branching
Branching
Out
P
Inp
P
&K
Interface BB BD 2
R
2 2 2
Interface BB BD 2
R
Transceiver
Transceiver
Modem BD
&K
Modem BD
Out
P
Inp
P
&K
RCVR BUS
XMTR BUS
Transmit side: If one of the regular channels is using the protection channel: - The Interface Baseband Board of the protected channel duplicates its signal on output port P (Input Selector of Modem Board Ch. P is fixed in position P). If no channel is using protection we will have one of the following scenarios (configuration dependent): - The Interface Baseband Board of the channel which most recently used protection continues to duplicate its signal on output port P. - The Interface Baseband Board of another (configurable) channel duplicates its signal on output port P. - LPT on protection: The Ch. P Interface Baseband Board drives its signal on output port P. Receive side: If one of the regular channels is using the protection channel: - The Interface Baseband Board Input Selector of the protected channel is switched to position P. - The Input Selectors of all other channels are in position R. If no channel is using protection: - The Input Selectors of all channels are in position R. If configuration allows LPT on protection: The Ch. P Interface Baseband Board transmits LPT on its RX output port. 212
B4017
Operators Guide
Automatic switch/restore: The RPS system can automatically perform unidirectional (RX) switch and restore operation based on detected error conditions. The following scenarios describe the basic principles of operation: If a channel N is protectable and its error conditions has been evaluated to a level above or equal to the switch limit, the RPS checks if any other protectable channel has more severe error conditions (a more significant need for being protected). If not, the error conditions of the protection channel is compared with the error conditions of channel N. If the error conditions of channel N is worse, an automatic protection of channel N is performed. If channel N is using protection and its error conditions are still above or equal to the restore limit but another channel now has worse conditions than channel N, an automatic restore of channel N is performed followed by an automatic protection of the other channel. If channel N is using protection and its error conditions are still above or equal to the restore limit but the protection channel now has worse conditions than channel N, an automatic restore of channel N is performed. If channel N is using protection and its error conditions have been evaluated to a level below the restore limit and the RPS configuration is revertive, an automatic restore of channel N is performed. If nonrevertive no action is taken. If an automatic switch request is rejected (due to alignment timeout or equipment related problems), the operation is retried repeatedly until the request is acknowledged or cancelled. An automatic switch request can be cancelled due to changes in error conditions, change in RPS configuration, manual switch requests or manual switch request. Manual switch/restore: Unidirectional (RX) manual switching can be requested from NEW. The different manual switch modes are described in the Manual Switch Control property sheet.
B4017
213
InterLink 2.1.3.1.4 Switch Configuration

The Switch Configuration property sheet displays/configures the protection switching system. There is one property sheet for each switch section. Section: The Section property page displays/configures RPS settings for the switch section.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Protection system: - Disabled: Protection system is disabled. All channels are locked in their regular state. No automatic or manual switch operations can be performed. - Enabled: N+1 frequency diversity protection is enabled. Switch mode: - Revertive: A channel that is currently protected will be restored to its regular channel if its switch conditions ceases. 214
B4017
Operators Guide
- Non-revertive: A channel that is currently protected will not be restored to its regular channel if its switch conditions ceases, unless another channel requests protection. Low Priority Traffic (LPT): If the protection channel contains an Interface Baseband Board the system can offer Low Priority Traffic, which is available when no regular channel is using the protection channel (available only if switch mode is revertive). This setting controls what signal to transmit on the LPT output port. - Disabled: MS-AIS is transmitted on the LPT output port. - Enabled: Any traffic received via the protection channel is unconditionally transmitted on the LPT output port. - Auto: If the protection channel carries LPT (i.e. none of the regular channels are using the protection channel and remote TX bridge state is LPT), its traffic is transmitted on the LPT output port. Otherwise MSAIS is transmitted on the LPT port. High priority channel: If a channel is selected as High Priority Channel it will have an associated Intrusion Limit which defines the degradation at which this channel always is given protection, no matter what conditions may exist on any other regular channel. - Channel: Possible values: none, 1N. - Intrusion limit: If the degradation level of the high priority channel exceeds this limit it will always get protection (unless Ch. P is more degraded). Possible values: Low RF, EW, LBER, HBER, OOS. Remote TX bridge: This property defines the state of the remote TX bridge when no regular channel is using the protection channel. The channel bridged on TX side will achieve the same protection switch performance as it would in a 1+1 system (shorter switch operation time). - Mode: (always revertive and Ch. P if LPT is enabled or auto). Revertive: When no channel requires protection the TX bridge will revert to the channel specified by the Revert to Ch property (this channels traffic will be duplicated on the protection channel). Non-revertive: The regular channel which most recently has been protected keeps its bridge on TX side (the TX bridge is left unchanged when the channel reverts to its regular state at RX side). This enables prepared switching of the channel most recently protected as long as no other channel needs to be protected. - Revert to Ch.: In revertive mode it controls which channel to be bridged on TX side while no switch requests exist. Unavailable in non-revertive mode. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
215
InterLink
Channel: The Channel property page displays/configures RPS settings for individual channels.
Property page controls: Channel configuration: The list contains individual settings for each channel. To edit data in the list double-click with the left mouse-button in the appropriate cell. - Priority: The switching priority of the channel (higher value means higher priority). The need for protection takes precedence over channel priority (i.e. only when two or more channels have equal error conditions they will be protected according to priority). A channel that has priority 0 is unprotected and will never be switched. Setting priority to 0 for Ch. P will disable the protection switch system completely (possible values for regular channels: 0N, where N is the number of regular channels. Possible values for protection channel: 0 and 1). - Switch limit: If the error conditions of a channels received signal gets equal to or greater than this limit, this channel requests to use the protection channel. (Not applicable for Ch. P). - Restore limit: If the error conditions of the received signal of a channel currently using the protection channel falls below this limit, the channel will be restored to its active state. (Not applicable for Ch. P). - Alignment timeout (ms): If an aligned switch/restore operation is requested and alignment of the regular channel and protection channel is not achieved within this time limit, the switch/restore operation is aborted. (Not applicable for Ch. P). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 216
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.3.1.5 Manual Switch Control

The Manual Switch Control property sheet displays the current switch status and also provides a button for manual switching/restoring. Section status property page:
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: RX Channel using protection (local): The channel that is currently using the protection channel. Remote TX bridge channel: The position of the TX switch at the other side of the hop. This position may be unknown in case of orderwire failure. Switch mode: - Auto: Switching will be performed automatically based on error conditions and switch criteria. - Manual: A manual switch operation is active. Press the Restore button to restore the protected channel. Manual request: yes/no. If yes, a manual switch operation has been requested. Status information on the pending switch request is displayed below (Channel, Alignment, Switch type, Reversion limit).
B4017
217
InterLink
LPT line out state: Whether the Line port of the Interface Baseband Board of the LPT channel is transmitting data traffic or MS-AIS. - Disabled: MS-AIS is transmitted. - Enabled. Data traffic is transmitted. Local TX bridge channel: Status of the local TX bridge. The local TX bridge is controlled by the RPS system at the remote NE. Orderwire status: Status of the communication channel used between the local RPS and the remote RPS. Switch button: Displays the Manual Switch dialogue box where a manual switch operation can be performed. Restore button: Sends a Manual Restore request to the NE that removes the existing manual switch request and allows automatic protection control of the channel. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet is open (5 seconds interval). Channel status property page:
Property page controls: See description above for the specific switch criteria. Remote TX status: Status of the TX alarms on the remote NE (on/off). - Modem board TX alarm. - Interface board TX alarm. 218
B4017
Operators Guide
Local RX status: Status of the RX criteria on this NE (on/off). - Low RF signal level (LOW-RF). - Early Warning (EW). - Low BER (LBER). - High BER (HBER). - Sync loss (OOS). - Interface regular port input alarm. - Interface protection port input alarm. - Alignment indicator. Modem board absent alarm: (on/off). Interface board absent alarm: (on/off). Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet is open (5 seconds interval). Manual Switch dialogue box: This dialogue box is used for sending a manual switch request to the RPS. When a manual switch is requested the RPS enters manual mode. To revert back to automatic mode, use the Restore button in the Manual Switch Control property sheet. Manual switch operations are only performed in the RX direction (Unidirectional).
Dialogue box controls: Channel to protect: Possible values: - System with LPT: 1...N, LPT. Selecting LPT means: Transmit LPT on protection as long as no regular channel degradation reaches the level defined by Revert on. - System without LPT: 1N, P. Selecting P means: Revert a protected channel to its regular state unless its degradation is at or above the level defined by Revert on.
B4017
219
InterLink
Alignment: - Aligned: Checks that the signal from protection channel is aligned with the signal from the regular channel before the switch operation is performed. If no alignment is achieved within a certain period of time [see the Switch Configuration property sheet], the switch operation is aborted. - Forced: Performs an immediate switch operation (no alignment). Switch type: - Locked: All automatic switch criteria is overridden by this manual request, and the manually switched channel will not be reverted by any event other than a manual restore request. - Not locked: The switch operation will only be executed if no other channels are degraded to the level defined by Revert on. If another channels degradation reaches this level later, the manual operation is suspended and the channel is restored to its regular state. The manual request will be reactivated when no other channels are degraded to this level. Revert on: Revert limit for a manually switched channel. Only applicable if switch type is Not locked. (Possible values: Low RF, EW, LBER, HBER, OOS) OK button: Sends a Manual Switch request to the NE and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box.
2.1.3.1.6
Hot Stand-by Systems

Two Hot Stand-by system configurations are supported. HSB: Performs protection switching on transmitted and received signal. Also denoted regular HSB. This system has one Interface Baseband Board associated with channel 1. HSB Dual Baseband: Performs protection switching on transmitted signal only. This system has two Interface Baseband Boards.
220
B4017
Operators Guide
Hot Stand-by Switch System
Modem Board Ch1 Interface Baseband Board
Tx In Rx Switch Out
Transceiver Unit Ch1
Modem Board Ch2
Transceiver Unit Ch2
Hot Stand-by Dual Baseband Switch System

Interface Baseband Board In Modem Board Transceiver Unit
Ch1
Out Interface Baseband Board In Tx Switch
Branching
Modem Board
Transceiver Unit
Ch2
Out
Automatic switch/restore: In regular HSB systems, the automatic switch system can be configured in either bidirectional or unidirectional mode. Unidirectional: The TX switch and RX switch operates independently based on their individual set of switch criteria. Bidirectional: If the TX switch changes state based on its switch criteria, the RPS is informed through the Transceiver state indicator on both channels. The RPS then switches the RX switch to the same channel if that channel is error-free. If the RX switch changes state based on its switch criteria, a switch request is also sent to the TX switch. If errorfree bidirectional switching is not possible, the switch operation will be unidirectional. Manual switch/restore: Manual switching can be requested from NEW. In regular HSB systems, the manual switch operation is Bidirectional.
B4017
Branching
Tx Switch
221
InterLink 2.1.3.1.7 Switch Configuration

The Switch Configuration property sheet displays/configures the protection switching system (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations). There is one property sheet for each switch section.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Traffic direction dependency: - Unidirectional: Receive direction (RX) and transmit direction (TX) are switched independently. - Bidirectional: Receive and transmit directions are switched simultaneously (linked). Switch limit: If the error conditions of the active channels received signal gets equal to or greater than this limit, an RX switchover to the other channel is requested. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 222
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.3.1.8 Manual Switch Control

The Manual Switch Control property sheet displays the current switch status and also provides a button for manual switching/restoring. Section Status property page:
Property page controls: Active RX channel: The currently active RX channel. (Not used in HSB Dual Baseband system configurations) Active TX channel: The currently active TX channel. Switch mode: - Auto: Automatic switching may be performed based on switch criteria [see Switch Configuration property sheet]. - Manual: A manual switch has been performed. The active channel will be locked until a manual restore operation is performed. Switch button: Displays the Manual Switch dialogue box where a manual switch operation can be performed. Restore button: Sends a Manual Restore request to the NE that reverts the switch system to Auto mode. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet is open (5 seconds interval).
B4017
223
InterLink
Channel Status property page:
Property page controls: See description above for the specific switch criteria. Local TX related status: Status of the TX alarms on this NE. - Transmitter state: (active, muted) - Transceiver communication: (OK, no response) - Transmit alarm: (on, off) - Modem TX alarm: (on, off) - Interface TX alarm: (on, off) Local RX status: Status of the RX alarms on this NE (on/off). - Early warning BER (EW-BER). - Low BER (LBER). - High BER (HBER). - Sync loss (OOS). - Interface regular port input alarm. - Interface protection port input alarm. - Alignment indicator. Modem board absent alarm: (on/off) Interface board absent alarm: (on/off) Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Manual Switch status is continuously updated as long as this property sheet is open (5 seconds interval). 224
B4017
Operators Guide
Manual Switch dialogue box: This dialogue box is used to send a manual switch request to the RPS. When a manual switch is requested the RPS enters manual mode. A manual switch operation locks the RX and TX switches on one of the channels (bidirectional). This operation is always forced (no alignment).
Dialogue box controls: Active channel: The channel to become active. OK button: Sends a Manual Switch request to the NE and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box.
B4017
225
InterLink 2.1.3.2 Diagnose

During the boot process of the boards/units, hardware and software information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests on hardware modules on the board/unit. Information gathered in the boot sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the board/unit can also be rebooted (warm restart) from this property sheet. The Supervisory Board contains two main modules: SU and RPS. The Diagnose property sheet provides one page for each main module. SU property page:
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Boot code version: Displays the SW version of the Boot code. Application code version: Displays the SW version of the Application code. PLD code version: Displays the SW version of the PLD code. Boot FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module used by the boot code. Code FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module used by the application code. SRAM size: Displays the size of the SRAM memory module. DRAM size: Displays the size of the DRAM memory module. 226
B4017
Operators Guide
Last restart: Displays last restart type: - Warm: Different events may result in warm restart: The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on front of the board or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW. A watchdog timer has detected a SW problem. The user has reconfigured the SW module from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.) - Cold: Cold restarts are caused by power loss. Restart counter: Counts number of warm restarts since last power on. Module info/warnings/errors: Displays information from the module tests performed at the last restart. SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the SW module. This will result in a warm restart of the board/unit. Note that a warm restart will not introduce bit errors in the data traffic. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
227
InterLink
RPS property page:
Property page controls: Application code version: Displays the SW version of the Application code. FPGA code version: Displays the SW version of the FPGA code. SRAM size: Displays the size of the SRAM memory module. Last restart: Displays last restart type: - Warm: Different events may result in warm restart: The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on front of the board or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW. A watchdog timer has detected a SW problem. The user has reconfigured the SW module from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.) - Cold: Cold restarts are caused by power loss. Restart counter: Counts number of warm restarts since last power on. Module info/warnings/errors: Displays information from the module tests performed at the last restart. SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the SW module. This will result in a warm restart of the board/unit. Note that a warm restart will not introduce bit errors in the data traffic. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
228
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.3.3 Production Data

The different boards/units contain production information. This information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Article code: Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit. Serial no.: The serial number of the board/unit. HW revision: The hardware revision. MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the Network Element. Production date: When the production process was completed for this board/unit Test date: When this product was tested by the factory test-department. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
229
InterLink 2.1.4 XCVR Unit Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the XCVR Unit node. Context menu:
Menu text Power Frequency Diagnose Looping Production Data Description Displays the Power property sheet Displays the Frequency property sheet Displays the Diagnose property sheet Displays the Looping property sheet Displays the Production Data property sheet
2.1.4.1
Power
The XCVR Unit provides a set of power control functions: RF input alarm thresholds can be set such that an alarm is raised when the input level exceeds the upper or lower limits. ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effectively reducing the interference probability in the network. When ATPC is enabled, the output power from the transmitter is automatically controlled. The ATPC alarm is generated if ATPC stops functioning. This alarm can be optionally delayed. Note that ATPC must be available on both sides of the hop in order to be used [see Available Functions property sheet]. If ATPC is not enabled, the transmitted output level can be set. The transmitter can also be muted. The Power property sheet is used for displaying/configuring the Power control settings.
230
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted. Maximum output level (dBm). The transmitters maximum output power. Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constant manual output level is used. Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings. Alarm Thresholds: - RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised. Default value: -30dBm. - RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes below this value the RF-INPUT-WARNING alarm is raised. Default value: -60dBm. MTPC: - Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC is disabled. ATPC: - Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is enabled on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate its output power such that the received input level at this receiver is equal to the reference level. - Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if ATPC regulation loop fails. (The ATPC alarm is raised). - Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is raised after the ATPC regulation loop fails. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
231
InterLink 2.1.4.2 Frequency

The XCVR Units Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the XCVR unit. To change frequency settings use the Frequency property sheet on the Equipment Node.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Frequency (MHz): The Transmitter and Receiver frequencies. LO synth. (MHz): The LO synthesizer frequencies. Frequency band (MHz): The RX and TX frequency limits of the transceiver. The frequency band is limited by the LO synthesizer and the branching filters. Branching filter: The centre frequencies and the bandwidths of the RX and TX branching filters. Compensation filter: The TX and RX compensation filter settings. Status: The Transceiver status: OK: Tuning and branching filters are OK. Need TX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the instructions. Need RX DRO tuning: Open the DRO tuning dialogue box and follow the instructions. TX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter. RX branching filter invalid: Replace the filter. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 232
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.4.3 Space Diversity

A Space Diversity system is using two antennas (denoted Main and Space) mounted apart and connected to one Space Diversity transceiver to achieve better performance. This requires different wave guide lengths for the two antennas, which results in different signal propagation delays at the Main and Space receiver inputs. To compensate for this effect the transceiver can add delay in one of the signal paths (normally in the Space path). Optimal receiver performance requires an accurate delay compensation. The two antenna signals are combined to get a single received signal for the demodulation process. The combiner can operate in automatic mode (controlled by signal quality criteria derived internally in the transceiver) or in manual mode (user selects how to combine the signals). Configuration
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page
B4017
233
InterLink
Property page controls: Combiner mode: Auto: The transceiver selects which signal to use. Disables Channel(s) used combo box. Manual: The user selects which signal to use. Enables Channel(s) used combo box. Channel(s) used: Main, Space or Combined. When Combiner mode is set to Manual, the user may choose which signal to use. When Combiner mode is set to Auto, it shows whether the Main, Space or combined signal is used. Automatic adjustment: Opens Automatic Space Delay Calculation dialogue and starts the coherent delay calculation routine in the modem card. Note! The routine uses the delay value currently set on the transceiver as starting point for its measurements and the coherent calculations. To achieve the best result it is recommended that the approximate delay is selected and set on the transceiver before starting the mentioned routine. Delay (ns): Add the specified delay to the Space signal path. Valid range is -6 to 130. Automatic Space Delay Calculation To simplify installation of a Space Diversity system, an automatic space delay calculation routine is implemented on the modem board. This routine attempts to calculate the optimal delay for the given system based on measurements from the modem board and transceiver unit. Note! The routine uses the delay value currently set on the transceiver as starting point for its measurements and the coherent calculations. To achieve the best result it is recommended that the approximate delay is selected and set on the transceiver before starting the automatic space delay calculation routine.
234
B4017
Operators Guide
The graph in the dialogue displays the calculated Delay Compensation Value as a function of the delay (in nanoseconds), and is updated each time a new delay value is set in the transceiver. The delay currently used in the calculation is displayed above the graph. The optimal delay is normally found at the graphs minimum. The valid range for the delay is -6 to 130 ns. Zooming: Zoom in on details by left-clicking and dragging the mouse. Zoom out by right-clicking. Graph coordinates: If the cursor is positioned over a valid delay on the graph, the coordinates for that delay are displayed in a popup window.
B4017
235
InterLink 2.1.4.3.1 Space Diversity Combiner Statistics

The Space Diversity Combiner Statistics page gives the user extended information regarding Space Diversity systems. The information might be useful during configuration of the delay imposed in order to achieve optimum signal reception. The two graphs show the RSSI levels [dBm] of Main and Space signals and the dispersion of the same signals. Detailed information regarding the dispersion graph is included further down. The Space Diversity Combiner Statistics page have a few useful features: Persistent polling Automatic logging of data to file Versatile graphs All features are explained in more detail further down.
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page 236
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: RSSI level graph: RSSI levels for Main and Space signals on vertical and horiontal axes, respectively. Dispersion graph: Measurement of the dispersion between the two signal. -1 = Dispersion in the upper frequency band of the channel gives a negative slope to the received signal 0 = ideal 1 = Dispersion in the lower frequency band of the channel creates a positive slope to the received signal (see also detailed information below) Number of samples: Total number of samples retrieved (and displayed) in current statistics set. Reset to 0 when Delete Stat is clicked. Read-only. Polling interval: Number of seconds between each poll for data. Editable when polling is not active. Start time: Shows (if currently polling) the date and time of when polling for the currently shown data was started. Read-only. Start/stop button: Start/stop polling using this button. Delete Stat button: Removes all data from the graph. Sets Number of samples to 0 and resets start time of polling. Log file remains unchanged.
2.1.4.3.1.1 Dispersion Graph

The dispersion graph shows the dispersion activity in each channel. The purpose of the graph is to evaluate if there is simultaneous dispersion activity in the two channels. If this happens, bit errors may occur. The space diversity system does not handle all situations with simultaneous dispersion in both channels. This could indicate that antenna position is not optimal. The dispersion graph in the screenshot above was created using a fading simulator with a repeating dispersion pattern with dispersion in only one channel at a time. This is not the typical condition you would get in the field. The graph shows that the dispersion is in one channel at a time since the plot follows the axes. The system handles this condition with no errors. The dispersion measurement is calculated from a slope measurement of the received signal. The slope of the signal is scaled to an interval from 1 to +1. Outside these limits the system can no longer safely demodulate each channel separately. When the slope is outside the limit, it will be plotted as +1 or -1 in the graph.
B4017
237
InterLink 2.1.4.3.1.2 Persistent polling

Polling is controlled by clicking the Start/Stop button. If polling is enabled and the Space Diversity Statistics page is closed, NEW-NMS continues to poll. The next time the property page is opened, all data in polling statistic are shown. Polling is stopped when NEW-NMS is closed.
2.1.4.3.1.3 Automatic logging of data

All Space Diversity Combiner Statistic data retrieved by NEW-NMS for each polled transceiver, are logged in individual text files. Every sample is time stamped. This allows for time based plotting of data in Excel: 1.Insert data into Excel (import or copy and paste). 2.Change time format: I. Mark time stamp column and open Format cells dialog. II. Under Number tab, change Category to Custom III. In Type list select dd/mm/yy hh:mm and change to dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss.000 (for simplicity omit date if time span is within same day). Press OK. IV. If cells containing time values show ####, increase column width until normal values appear. 3.The formula for calculating the dispersion measurements (slopes) used in the dispersion graph is (High band detector level - Low band detector level)/100. In the log file, these values are found under Slope Data Main/Space as HB and LB, respectively. 4.Mark desired data and start Excels Chart Wizard 5.Select XY (Scatter) as chart type and desired chart sub-type (e.g. Scatter with data points connected by smoothed lines). 6.Continue thru wizard and click Finish. Note! Opening the log file in Word or Excel while polling is active, may cause loss of log data. These programs deny other programs access to files opened normally. Therefore NEW-NMS will not be able to append the log file under these circumstances. To avoid this problem, the log file must be opened as a copy or copied to a different folder before opening. Logging is stopped if free disk space where NEW-NMS is installed drops below 50 MB. The protection mechanism is implemented to avoid flooding the hard disk. This may occur during long term polling with short polling interval (with 1 second interval the log file grows approx. 200 kB/h or 4.7 MB/day). Logging is resumed when free space exceeds 50 MB.
B4017
238
Operators Guide 2.1.4.3.1.4 Versatile graphs

The graphs have the following features: Zooming: Zoom in on details by left-clicking and dragging the mouse. Zoom out by right-clicking. Graph coordintates: If the cursor is positioned over a valid sample on the graph, the coordinates for that sample are displayed in a popup window.
B4017
239
InterLink 2.1.4.4 DRO Tuning

The XCVR Units DRO Tuning property sheet is used to enable and disable DRO Tuning mode for the individual XCVR unit. The tuning of the DRO frequency is performed manually on the XCVR unit.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: DRO Tuning Mode: - Disabled: DRO Tuning mode is disabled for both DROs - TX Tuning: Enables DRO Tuning mode for TX DRO - RX Tuning: Enables DRO Tuning mode for RX DRO Status TX: Displays information concerning frequency lock and screw direction for TX DRO Status RX: Displays information concerning frequency lock and screw direction for RX DRO 240
B4017

A looping function is provided as a powerful tool for testing different system modules. Available Loop: Transceiver Near End RF Loop: The RF output signal is looped back to RF input. This loop can be used to test the entire data traffic path; from the customer interface at the Interface Baseband Board to the RF output at the Transceiver Unit and back to the customer interface. The Looping property sheet displays the main traffic loop for the selected Transceiver Unit. The loop can be toggled on/off by using the loop button. When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop may disconnect NEW from the NE (Deactivating the loop manually may not be possible.) Only one main loop can be active for each channel at the same time. When activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active loops on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular loops. Main loops for all boards/units in the system can be displayed from the Equipment node.
B4017
241
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop: - Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown. - Black: The loop is off (inactive) - Red: The loop is on (active) Loops will be automatically cleared after: Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating a loop. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this dialogue box is open. 242
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.4.6 Diagnose

During the boot process of the boards/units hardware and software information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests on the hardware modules installed on the board/unit. Information gathered in the boot sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the board/unit can also be rebooted (warm start) from this property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Boot code version: Displays the SW version of the Boot code. Application code version: Displays the SW version of the Application code. FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module. SRAM size: Displays the size of the SRAM memory module.
B4017
243
InterLink
Last restart: Displays last restart type: - Warm: Different situations may result in warm restart: The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on front of the board/unit or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW. A watchdog timer has detected a SW problem. The user has reconfigured the board/unit from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.) - Cold: Cold restarts are caused by power loss. Restart counter: Counts number of warm restarts since last power on. Module info/warnings/errors: Displays information from the module tests performed at the last restart. SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the unit/board. This will result in a warm restart of the board/unit. Note that a warm restart will introduce bit errors in the data traffic. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
244
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.4.7 Production Data

The different boards/units contain some production information. This information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Article code: Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit. Serial no.: The serial number of the board/unit. HW revision: The hardware revision. Production date: When the production process was completed for this board/unit Test date: When this product was tested by the factory test-department. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
245
InterLink 2.1.5 Modem Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Modem Board node.
Menu text Error Pulse Output Looping Diagnose Production Data
&RQWH[WPHQX
Description Displays the Pulse Output property sheet Displays the Looping property sheet Displays the Diagnose property sheet Displays the Production Data property sheet
2.1.5.1
Error Pulse Output

The Demodulator generates pulses when transmission errors are detected. The number of pulses per second is a measurement of quality of the received signals. These pulses can be routed out on the connection panel. Note that these pulses are generated for each radio channel before protection switching. The Error Pulse Output property sheet displays/configures the output of error pulses.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page
246
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: Disabled/Enabled: Disables or enables error pulses to be routed to the connection panel. Source: Selects which error pulses to be routed to the connection panel. Values: - FEC Demodulator: FEC pulses from the Viterbi Decoder. - B1 Demodulator: B1 pulses from the Demodulator. - B2 Demodulator: B2 pulses from the Demodulator. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.5.2
Looping
Different looping functions are provided as a powerful tool for testing different system modules. Available Loops: Modem Near End IF Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface and Modem Board. Modem Far End Loop: The Radio input signal from the remote element is looped back to the Radio output. This loop tests the functionality of the Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this element and the remote element. The Looping property sheet displays main traffic loops for the selected Modem Board. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop manually may not be possible). Only one main loop can be active for each channel at the same time. When activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active loops on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular loops. Main loops for all boards/units in the system can be displayed from the Equipment node.
B4017
247
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop: - Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown. - Black: The loop is off (inactive) - Red: The loop is on (active) Loops will be automatically cleared after: Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating a loop. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this dialogue box is open. 248
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.5.3 Diagnose

See SVCE Board Diagnose
2.1.5.4
Production Data
See SVCE Board Production Data
2.1.6
Modem Board - Radio Port Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Radio Port node.
&RQWH[WPHQX
Menu text BER Thresholds Description Displays the Bit Error Rate Thresholds property sheet
2.1.6.1
BER Thresholds
The Viterbi decoder is using a Viterbi low complexity algorithm for decoding and error correcting the received bit-sequence. The Viterbi Bit Error Rate is used as quality measurement for the radio hop. Alarms are generated when the Viterbi Bit Error Rate exceeds certain threshold values. Alarm name HBER LBER EW Default BER threshold 10 -3 10 -6 10-10 Default alarm severity Major Minor Warning
Internal proportions: HBER>LBER>EW The BER thresholds can be displayed/configured in the BER Thresholds property sheet.
B4017
249
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: HBER: A HBER alarm is generated and AIS is inserted when the bit error rate exceeds this value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12. LBER: A LBER alarm is generated when the bit error rate exceeds this value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12. Early warning (EW): An EW alarm is generated when the bit error rate exceeds this value. Value range: 10-3 - 10-12. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
250
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.7 Interface Baseband Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the Interface Baseband Board node.
Menu text Available Functions Wayside Channel Termination/Clock Select Looping Diagnose Production Data
&RQWH[WPHQX
Description Displays the Available Functions property sheet Displays the Wayside Channel property sheet Displays the Termination/Clock Select property sheet Displays the Looping property sheet Displays the Diagnose property sheet Displays the Production Data property sheet
2.1.7.1
Available Functions
Some functions are optional. The optional functions can be ordered from your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used to make functions available for a specific board with a given serial number. The Available Functions property sheet displays/configures availability of optional functions. To make new functions available, press the Set button and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the authentication string.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue box. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
B4017
251
InterLink
Property page controls: The check boxes are only for display purposes. To modify available functions press the property sheets Set button and enter the authentication string. Wayside Channel: When checked, the Wayside function is available on this board Note that Configuration of the Wayside channel is provided in the Wayside property sheet. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.7.2
Wayside Channel
A Wayside Channel can be inserted into the SOH frame in either linedirection or radio direction. The Wayside Channel occupies 33 bytes (32 bytes data + 1 byte alignment information) of the SOH frame. The Wayside property sheet displays/configures the Wayside Channel.
Note: The Wayside function must be available on the board in order to be used. [see the Available Functions property sheet.] Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
252
B4017
Operators Guide
Property page controls: Status: When enabled, the Wayside Channel is inserted into the SOH frame. If any of the 33 time-slots are occupied, the user will be notified when trying to enable the wayside channel. Direction: The traffic direction where the Wayside Channel is inserted into the SOH frame: - Line: Line direction of the main traffic channel. - Radio: Radio direction of the main traffic channel. SOH frame button: Displays the SOH byte Selection dialogue box, showing the current use of the SOH frame. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.7.3
Looping
The Interface Baseband Board provides different looping functions as a powerful tool for testing different system modules. The board also provides PRBS generators and PRBS error counters for the 2Mbit/s Wayside channel. Loops and PRBS settings can be displayed/configured from the Looping property sheet.
2.1.7.3.1
Main Loops
Available Loops: Baseband Line Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output. This loop tests the line input/output circuitry. Baseband Near End Loop: The Line input signal is looped back to the Line output at the interface towards the Modem Board. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board. Baseband Far End Loop: The input signal from the Modem Board is looped back to the Modem Board at the Customer Line Interface. This loop tests the functionality of the Interface Board, Modem Board and Transceiver Unit on this element in addition to the hop and the remote element. The Looping property sheet displays main traffic loops for the selected Interface Baseband Board. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. When activating a loop, a Loop Timer dialogue box is displayed where the user must enter the time period that the loop shall be active. Activating a loop may disconnect NEW from the NE. (Deactivating the loop manually may not be possible). Only one main loop can be active for each channel at the same time. When activating a loop, the NE will automatically deactivate any other active loops on the same channel. This is to prevent the user from setting circular loops.
B4017
253
InterLink
Main loops for all boards/units in the system can be displayed from the Equipment node.
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for active page Property page controls: Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop: - Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown. - Black: The loop is off (inactive) - Red: The loop is on (active) Loops will be automatically cleared after: Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activating a loop. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this dialogue box is open. 254
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.7.3.2 Wayside Channel Loops and PRBS Settings

Available Loops: Wayside Far End Loop Wayside Near End Loop A PRBS signal (215-1) can be inserted into both traffic directions of the wayside channel instead of the regular traffic. A PRBS counter can be configured to count PRBS errors on one of the traffic directions. This is a powerful way to test the quality of the radio connection. Note: Wayside Channel must be enabled on this board to use these test functions [see the Wayside Channel property sheet].
Property page controls: Loop buttons: See description of main traffic loop buttons above. PRBS Generator: Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into one or both directions of the wayside channel. - Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS signal from the generator to the wayside channel. Red=enabled, black=disabled, blue=unknown status. - Inverted: When checked, the generated PRBS signal is inverted. 255
B4017
InterLink
PRBS Check: Counts PRBS errors (An error is detected when the signal differs from the expected PRBS signal). Errors can be counted at one of the directions of the wayside channel. - Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error detection for the desired traffic direction. Red=enabled, black=disabled, blue=unknown status. - Inverted: When checked, an inverted PRBS signal is expected. - Count: The total number of deviations detected between the received signal and expected PRBS signal. - Rate: The number of deviations detected between the received signal and expected PRBS signal per second. - Reset button. Resets the cumulative counter. - Status: OK: Error check is valid. Wayside Channel disabled: Wayside channel is not enabled [See the Wayside Channel property sheet]. Counter overflow: The error check is not valid because the counter has exceeded its limit (=232) and wrapped around. Sync loss: The error check is not valid due to sync loss on the PRBS sequence. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this property sheet is open.
2.1.7.4
Diagnose
See SVCE Board Diagnose
2.1.7.5
Production Data
See SVCE Board Production Data
256
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.8 Interface Board - Optical Port Node

The following table describes the configuration function for the Optical Port node. (This function is only available for SMF optical interfaces).
&RQWH[WPHQX
Menu text Laser Control Description Displays the Laser Control property sheet
2.1.8.1
Laser Control
The laser at the optical interface can be operated in two different modes: Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): This function is designed for eye safety purposes according to ITU-T G.958. In this mode, the laser is automatically shut off after 2 seconds when Loss Of Optical Signal is detected by the receiver on the other side of the hop. After a certain Waiting time the laser is turned on. This sequence is repeated until an optical signal is detected on the other side of the hop.
LOS detected 2s Laser Output Waiting time Waiting time Waiting time 2s 2s signal detected
Manual control: The laser can be switched on/off manually from NEW.
B4017
257
InterLink
Property page controls: ALS: Automatic Laser Shutdown. The laser is automatically switched on/off. - Enabled: The Laser is operated in ALS mode. The laser cannot be manually switched on/off. - Disabled: The Laser is operated in manual mode. The laser can be manually switched on/off. - Waiting time: The period of time the laser is off after automatic laser shutdown. - Get button: Retrieves the current ALS settings from the NE. - Set button: Sends the current ALS control settings to the NE. - Restart (90s) button: Used for test purposes to force the laser on for 90 seconds. - Restart (2s) button: Used for test purposes to force the laser on for 2 seconds. Manual Control: The laser can be manually switch on/off. - Status: Displays whether the laser is on or off. - On button: Turns the laser on. (Only available when ALS is disabled.) - Off button: Turns the laser off. (Only available when ALS is disabled.) Close button: Closes this dialogue box. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box.
258
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.9 SVCE Board Node

The following table describes the configuration functions for the SVCE Board node.
&RQWH[WPHQX
Menu text Available Functions 64kb/s Channels Telephone Settings Looping Diagnose Production Data Description Displays the Available Functions property sheet Displays the 64kb/s Channels property sheet Displays the Phone Settings property sheet Displays the Looping property sheet Displays the Diagnose property sheet Displays the Production Data property sheet
B4017
259
InterLink 2.1.9.1. Available Functions

Some functions are optional. The optional functions can be ordered from your Nera equipment supplier. You will then get an encrypted authentication string that can be used for making functions available for this specific board. The Available Functions property sheet displays/configures availability of optional functions. To make new functions available, press the Set button and a dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the authentication string.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Displays the Available Functions Authentication dialogue box. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: The check-boxes are only for display purposes. To modify available functions, press the property sheets Set button and enter the authentication string. 64 kb/s channels: When checked, the 64kb/s channels are available on this board. The 64kb/s channels are configured from the 64kb/s Channels property sheet. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
260
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.9.2 64kb/s Channels

On the SVCE board up to four 64kb/s channels can be inserted into the SOH in either line direction or radio direction. A 64kb/s channel occupies 1 byte (SOH byte) of the SOH. Different electrical interfaces are supported: Channels 1 and 3 support G.703 Co and G.703 Contra, while channels 2 and 4 support V.11 Contra. Customer interfaces are located at the connection panel. Near end loops are available for each 64kb/s channel for test purposes [see SVCE Board Looping property sheet] The 64kb/s channels property sheet is used to display/configure the four 64kb/s channels.
Note: 64kb/s channels must be available on the board in order to be used. [See the Available Functions property sheet for the SVCE Board].
B4017
261
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Channel: The main traffic channel where the 64kb/s channel is inserted into a SOH byte. Direction: The traffic direction where the 64kb/s channel is inserted into a SOH byte: - Line: Line direction of a channel that only has one line direction (one interface board). - Line (dir1): Line direction 1 of a channel that has two line directions (two interface boards in a double terminal system). - Line (dir2): Line direction 2 of a channel that has two line directions (two interface boards in a double terminal system). - Radio: Radio direction of a channel that only has one radio direction (one transceiver unit). - Radio (dir1): Radio direction 1 of a channel that has two radio directions (two transceiver units in a double terminal or repeater system). - Radio (dir2): Radio direction 2 of a channel that has two radio directions (two transceiver units in a double terminal or repeater system). Status: When enabled, the 64kb/s channel is inserted into the selected SOH byte. Type: Electrical interface: See diagram below for description of the different interfaces. - G.703 Co - G.703 Contra - V.11 Contra SOH byte: The SOH byte to use for this 64kb/s channel. If pressing the SOH button, a SOH byte Selection dialogue box is displayed showing the current use of the SOH frame. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
262
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.9.3 Telephone Settings

The Telephone Settings property sheet is used to display/configure SVCE telephone interfaces.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Traffic SOH channel: Insertion of service telephone channel (64kb/s) into radio direction(s) of traffic channel 1 (and channel P in a N+1 system or channel 2 in a HSB system). The service telephone channel is only inserted in radio direction(s), not in the line direction(s) (for repeaters and double terminals, the service telephone channel is inserted in both radio directions).
B4017
263
InterLink
- Enabled: When checked the service telephone channel is inserted into the selected SOH byte. - SOH byte: The SOH byte to use for this telephone network. If pressing the SOH button, a SOH byte selection dialogue is displayed showing the current use of the SOH frame. SOH bytes supporting E/M Wire and control signals: E1, F1and E2. (The use of PABX adapter requires control signals). PABX: Private Automatic Branch eXchange. To connect the service telephone to an external PABX subscriber line. (Only available on SVCE boards that contains a PABX adapter) - Number: The number of this PABX adapter. This is the number that must be called to access the external PABX connection. Note that the number must be preceded by #. Values: #1...#8. Maximum number of PABX adapters in a system is 8, and each must have a unique number. Internal telephone: This is the handset connected at the shelf connection panel to connector marked PHONE4/PHONE5. The handset is supplied by NERA and the interface dont need any adaptation. - Number: The number of the internal telephone. This is the number that must be called to make this telephone ring. Values 00..99, always use two digits. Each telephone in a system must have a unique number. - Input level from mic. (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value: 0.0dBm. - Output level to speaker (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value: 6.0dBm. External telephone: This is a handset that can be located up to 1000 meters away. The interface gain can be varied to accept different mic. input level and output level to speaker. If the interface is unused, inputand output- amplifiers can be switched off. - Number: The number of the external telephone. This is the number that must be called to make this telephone ring. Values 00..99, always use two digits. Each telephone in a system must have a unique number. - Input level from mic. (dBm): Adjustable range: 1.0dBm to 5.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: 0.0 dBm. - Output level to speaker (dBm): Adjustable range: -5.0dBm to 11.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm. Other Equipment 1 & 2: These two balanced interfaces are meant for interconnection between similar equipment. A maximum of 3 service telephone boards can be connected this way. These interfaces are not over-voltage protected and not galvanic isolated and are therefore not recommended for long lines or outdoor use. The input gain can be adjusted 1dB to compensate for cable loss and component variations. If the interface is unused, the input amplifier can be switched off. - Port input level (dBm): Adjustable range: -5.0dBm to 7.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm. - Port output level (dBm): Not adjustable. Nominal value 6.0dBm.
B4017
264
Operators Guide
4 Wire interface: This is a balanced, galvanic isolated interface meant to interface to various types of equipment. Input- and output- gain can be adjusted over a wide range. This interface can be used together with E/ M-wire to fulfil a standard multiplex channel. If the interface is unused, the input- and output- amplifiers can be switched off. - Port input level (dBm): Adjustable range: -0.5dBm to 16.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm. - Port output level (dBm): Adjustable range: -3.5dBm to 19.0dBm in 0.5dBm steps or off. Nominal value: -6.0 dBm. Engineering OrderWire: This balanced interface is used when more than 3 service telephone boards have to be connected. The interface is not over-voltage protected. Together with one of the Other Equipment interfaces a serial connection can be established. Internal telephone and loudspeaker are not connected to this interface. Internal telephone will therefore function properly only on the two service boards connected to the Other Equipment interface. - Port input level (dBm): Not adjustable: Nominal value 6.0dBm. - Port output level (dBm): Not adjustable: Nominal value 6.0dBm. Enable insertion of analog equipment (off hook simulation): Used for connection to Other Equipment. Must be checked in order to use PABX, Other Equipment, 4 Wire interface or Engineering OrderWire. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. 1. E/M-Wire The Service Channel can be used as a through connection of a Multiplexer Channel. By activating M-Wire (Inp) at one side of the radio hop, E-Wire (Out) will be activated on the other side. Ctrl Inp/Ctrl Out The Ctrl signal is used for connection/disconnection of a PABX and to switch loudspeakers ON/OFF. The Ctrl signal is activated by lifting the telephone Off Hook and pushing the # button, and deactivated by putting the telephone back On Hook. By activating the Ctrl signal both Ctrl Out on own Service Board and the Service Board on the other side of the radio hop, are activated. Between RPS-sections, Ctrl Out must be wired to Ctrl Inp to take effect at the next section. If a PABX is connected at a station with two or more terminals, all Ctrl Out signals have to be interconnected. Call Inp/Call Out These signals are dedicated for collective call to/from other Service Channel equipment with different Call Signal from DTMF (e.g. Nera Service Telephone, 2NF467A). When Call Inp is activated, Internal- and
B4017
265
InterLink
External-telephones will start ringing on both sides of the radio hop, and the Call Out will be activated on the other side. If a Collective Call is sent from this board, by pressing * button, the Call Out on both sides of the hop will be activated. Loudspeaker A loudspeaker output without volume control is provided. Signals from Engineering Orderwire inp. and from Internal Telephone, are not connected to loudspeaker output. Signalling via Optocoupler Three Inp/Out-signals are connected via optocouplers. Connection of correct ground and battery polarity, are automatically switched, dependent on which battery pole is grounded. Grounding of positive battery pole, principle drawing:
+5V From Logic
Out
-VBAT
To Logic Inp +5V
Grounding of negative battery pole, principle drawing:

+5V From Logic Out
Inp
To Logic +VBAT +5V
266
B4017

The SVCE Board Looping property sheet displays the 64kb/s channel loops. Loops can be toggled on/off by using the loop buttons. Several loops can be active at the same time. Unlike the main loops, there is no loop timer that automatically clears the 64kb/s channel loops. When a loop is active a corresponding alarm is raised on the board/unit.
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes the status of the loop: - Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information has yet not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown. - Black: The loop is off (inactive) - Red: The loop is on (active) - Grey: The corresponding 64kb/s channel is not enabled. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 seconds interval) as long as this property sheet is open.
B4017
267
InterLink 2.1.9.5 Diagnose

During the boot process of the boards/units hardware and software information is collected. The boot process also performs different tests on the hardware modules installed on the board/unit. Information gathered in the boot sequence is displayed in the Diagnose property sheet. The SW on the board/unit can also be rebooted (warm start) from this property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Boot code version: Displays the SW version of the Boot code. Application code version: Displays the SW version of the Application code. PLD code version: Displays the SW version of the PLD code. FLASH size: Displays the size of the FLASH memory module. SRAM size: Displays the size of the SRAM memory module. Last restart: Displays last restart type: - Warm: Different situations may result in warm restart: The user has reset the board/unit by pressing the reset button on front of the board/unit or by sending a SW Restart request from NEW. A watchdog timer has detected a SW problem. The user has reconfigured the board/unit from NEW. (Some reconfigurations result in a restart.) - Cold: Cold restarts are caused by power loss. 268
B4017
Operators Guide
Restart counter: Counts number of warm restarts since last power on. Module info/warnings/errors: Displays information from the module tests performed at the last restart. SW Restart button: Sends a SW Restart message to the unit/board. This will result in a warm restart of the board/unit. Note that a warm restart will introduce bit errors in the data traffic. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
B4017
269
InterLink 2.1.9.6 Production Data

The different boards/units contain production information. This information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Article code: Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit. Serial no.: The serial number of the board/unit. HW revision: The hardware revision. Production date: When the production process was completed for this board/unit Test date: When this product was tested by the factory test-department. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
270
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.10 Transmission RX Interface Nodes

The following table describes the configuration function for the RX Interface nodes in the Transmission branch. Context menu:
Menu text AIS Insert Description Displays the AIS Insert property sheet
2.1.10.1
AIS Insert
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used to verify that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done by either inserting a fixed byte or a user defined ASCII string in the J0 slot in the RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side. The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string (J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a mismatch, an AIS can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is exceeded.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page
B4017
271
InterLink
Property page controls: Insert AIS when Viterbi HBER threshold exceeded: When checked, an Alarm Indication Signal is inserted when the Viterbi HBER threshold is exceeded. Insert AIS When trace mismatch: When checked, an Alarm Indication Signal is inserted when there is a mismatch between the trace string set in the Path Trace property sheet and the trace string specified in this property sheet. Insert AIS when RF ID mismatch: When checked, an Alarm Indication Signal is inserted when there is a mismatch between the RF ID set in the Path Trace property sheet and the RF ID specified in this property sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node. AIS remove delay: Regenerator Section Trace (J0): - Not used: The Regenerator Section Trace String is not used. - Fixed byte: The Regenerator Section Trace String is one byte ( =8bit) long. - User Message (ASCII): The Regenerator Section Trace String is a user defined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long) - Expected: The ASCII string or fixed byte to be compared with received J0 in RSOH. If mismatch, AIS will be inserted if the Insert AIS when trace mismatch is checked. The Expected field normally contains the same values as the Trace String in the Path Trace property sheet at the transmit end of the path. - Received: The ASCII string or fixed byte in received J0 in RSOH. - Status: The status of the Regenerator Section Trace: OK: Expected and received Regenerator Section Trace are identical. RS-TIM alarm: (Regenerator Section Trace Identifier Mismatch) Mismatch between expected and received RS Trace. LOF error: Loss of frame alarm on received STM-1 signal. Thus, J0 is not available. Alarm status, OK or RS-TIM alarm will be latched. CRC error: CRC error in received Regenerator Section Trace. (Only in User Message mode) Invalid: Not valid User Message received. RF ID: (The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node): - Not Used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off - Expected: The value to be compared with the RF ID byte in the received SOH. If mismatch, AIS will be inserted if the Insert AIS when RF ID mismatch is checked. The Expected field normally contains the same values as the RF ID value in the Path Trace property sheet at the transmit end of the path. - Received: he received RF ID value. 272
B4017
Operators Guide
- Status: The status of the RF ID: OK: Expected and received RF ID values are identical. RF-ID alarm: Mismatch between expected and received RF ID values. Invalid: Not valid RF ID value received. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
2.1.11
Transmission TX Interface Nodes

The following table describes the configuration function for the TX Interface nodes in the Transmission branch. Context menu:
Menu text Path Trace Description Displays the Path Trace property sheet
2.1.11.1
Path Trace
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) functionality are used to test that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done by either inserting a fixed byte or an user defined ASCII sting in the J0 slot in the RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side. The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string (J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet . If theres a mismatch, an AIS can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is exceeded.
B4017
273
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Send the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help Button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Regenerator Section Trace (J0): - Enabled: When checked, a trace string is inserted into the J0 byte of the RSOH. - Fixed byte: The Regenerator Section Trace String is one byte ( =8bit) long. - User Message (ASCII): The Regenerator Section Trace String is a user defined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long) - Trace String: The ASCII string or fixed byte to be inserted into the J0 byte in the RSOH. RF ID: (The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio node): - Not Used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
274
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.12 SOH Frame

The use of Section OverHead is implemented according to ITU-T Recommendation G.707. Each byte in the SOH frame is a 64kb/s channel. Some of the SOH bytes are dedicated for framing, performance monitoring and internal signalling, while others may be used for 64kb/s user channels, Wayside traffic, SVCE telephone or DCC.
2.1.12.1
System Description
SOH on a 2+1 system with LPT
Interface SOH BUS Common SOH BUS
SU
SOH Adapter
InterfaceP R Line P
ModulatorP
TransceiverP
Line
Line
Interface2 R P
Modulator2
Transceiver2
The Section OverHead is managed using a set of SOH buses in the connection panel. In the radio direction (over the radio hop), a subset of the inserted SOH bytes are protected by redundancy. Some of the SOH bytes are transmitted on two of the traffic channels (channel 1 and 2 in a N+0 system or channel 1 and P in a N+1 system). One bus, denoted SOH Common Bus is provided for the redundancy protection. This bus provides connections to the OH adapter on the Supervisory Board, which is connected to the Modem Boards of channel 1 and 2 in a N+0 system or channel 1 and P in a N+1 system. The Common Bus is automatically chosen if the selected SOH byte is available on the Common Bus.
Branching
Interface1 R
Modulator1
Transceiver1
B4017
275
InterLink
These SOH bytes are included in the Common Bus:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU B1 MS1 MS2 E1 UN UN F1 NU D1 MS3 UN D2 UN UN D3 UN AU - Pointer B2 B2 B2 K1 UN UN K2 UN D4 UN UN D5 UN UN D6 UN D7 UN UN D8 UN UN D9 UN D10 UN UN D11 UN UN D12 UN S1 UN UN UN UN M1 E2 NU System Common Bus Common Bus (N+0 systems only)
9 NU NU UN UN UN UN UN NU
The SOH bytes of the Common Bus are inserted to the SOH of the traffic at the Modem Boards of both channels. Thus, in a N+1system configuration, protection switching must be taken into account when selecting SOH bytes in the radio direction: If a SOH byte is inserted into the Common Bus, the corresponding SOH bytes on all other channels are marked unavailable, because these SOH bytes would be overwritten by the Common Bus in case of protection switching. If a SOH byte not included in the Common Bus subset is selected on channel P, this byte may be overwritten by any channel using protection. If a SOH byte not included in the Common Bus subset is selected on channel 1N, the SOH byte will never be overwritten by the Common Bus, but will follow regular protection switching. Four buses, denoted SOH Interface Buses, are provided for SOH connections to different Interface Baseband Boards. Thus, user channels can be configured to use the SOH on four different traffic channels and directions simultaneously in addition to the Common Bus. Each Interface SOH Bus has two data lines where one half of the SOH is transmitted on each data line, denoted line A and line B.
276
B4017
Operators Guide
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU B1 MS1 MS2 E1 UN UN F1 NU D1 MS3 UN D2 UN UN D3 UN AU - Pointer B2 B2 B2 K1 UN UN K2 UN D4 UN UN D5 UN UN D6 UN D7 UN UN D8 UN UN D9 UN D10 UN UN D11 UN UN D12 UN S1 UN UN UN UN M1 E2 NU System Line A
Line B
2.1.12.2
DCC
Data Communication Channels can be inserted into the SOH in both Radio and Line directions. Single or multiple SOH bytes (D1-D3 or D4-D12) can be selected. In the Radio direction the DCC is inserted directly into the RSOH adapter on the Supervisory Board. DCC insertion is therefore limited to the Common Bus subset and multiple D1-D3 in the Radio direction. (multiple D4-D12 is also available in the Radio direction in N+0 systems).
2.1.12.3
Wayside Channel
At each Interface Baseband Board a Wayside Channel can be inserted into the SOH in either the Radio or Line direction [See the Wayside Channel property sheet]. Note that insertion of Wayside into the SOH does not use any SOH Bus, since the SOH bytes are directly inserted at the Interface Baseband Boards. The following bytes are used by the Wayside Channel:
B4017
277
InterLink
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU B1 MS1 MS2 E1 UN UN F1 NU D1 MS3 UN D2 UN UN D3 UN AU - Pointer B2 B2 B2 K1 UN UN K2 UN D4 UN UN D5 UN UN D6 UN D7 UN UN D8 UN UN D9 UN D10 UN UN D11 UN UN D12 UN S1 UN UN UN UN M1 E2 NU System Wayside Channel
2.1.12.4
64kb/s Channels
Four 64kb/s Channels can be inserted into a SOH Bus at each SVCE Board. [See the 64kb/s channels property sheet]. Each 64kb/s ASIC can only be connected to one of the data lines of a SOH bus (Interface SOH Bus line A, Interface SOH Bus line B or Common Bus). Therefore, 64kb/s channel 1 and 2 must be configured to use the same data line and 64kb/s channel 3 and 4 must be configured to use the same data line.
COMMON_SOH_BUS A B INTF_SOH_BUS1
MUX
CH1-G703 CO/CONTRA CH2-V11
64kb/s ADAPTER
A INTF_SOH_BUS2 B A INTF_SOH_BUS3 B A INTF_SOH_BUS4 B COMMON_SOH_BUS
CH3-G703 CO/CONTRA CH4-V11
64kb/s ADAPTER MUX
A B INTF_SOH_BUS1 A INTF_SOH_BUS2 B A INTF_SOH_BUS3 B A INTF_SOH_BUS4 B
2.1.12.5
SVCE Telephone
The service telephone channel can be inserted into the SOH in the Radio direction. [See the SVCE Telephone property page]. The selection of SOH bytes is limited to E1, E2 and F1.
278
B4017
Operators Guide 2.1.12.6 SOH Selection Dialogue box

The SOH Selection dialogue box displays the current use of the SOH on a specific traffic channel and direction.
Dialogue box controls: Grid control: Displays the current use of the SOH for a specific traffic channel and direction. Click in the grid to change the SOH byte selection. Radio buttons: Select multiple SOH bytes D1-D3 or D4-D12 by selecting the corresponding radio button (applies to DCC only). OK button: Applies the current selection and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Help: Displays help for the dialogue box. A brief description of the dedicated SOH bytes (see ITU-T Recommendation G.707 for more information): A1: Frameword (11110110). A2: Frameword (00101000). J0: Regenerator Section Trace [See the Path Trace property sheet]. B1: BIP-8 checksum for the regenerator section [See the Performance chapter]. B2: BIP-24 checksum for the multiplex section [See the Performance chapter]. MS1 and MS2: Media Specific bytes. Used by Nera equipment for Radio Protection Switching communication.
B4017
279
InterLink
MS3: Media Specific byte. Used by Nera equipment for: - RF-id: [See the Path Trace property sheet]. - Remote Reset: [See the Remote Reset property sheet]. - ATPC: control signal for ATPC. [See the Power property sheet]. - E/M-Wire for E1, E2 and F1. [See the SVCE Telephone property sheet]. K1 and K2: Intended to be used for Multiplex Section - Automatic Protection Switching. Only a part of K2 is used by Nera equipment: - MS-RDI: Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication. S1: Synchronization status. M1: Multiplex Section - Remote Error Indication (MS-REI). [See the Performance chapter] SOH bytes available for user channels (64kb/s, Wayside Channel, DCC, SVCE telephone). E1: Intended to be used as Orderwire for regenerator section termination. Default SOH byte for SVCE telephone. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC. E2: Intended to be used as Orderwire for multiplex section termination. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC. F1: Intended to be used for V.11 or G703 interfaces. Default SOH byte for 64kb/s channels. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC. D1-D3: Intended to be used as embedded control channel for regenerator section. Single bytes can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC. Multiple bytes can be used for DCC. D4-D12: Intended to be used as embedded control channel for multiplex section. Single bytes can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s or DCC. Multiple bytes can be used for DCC. NU: National Use. The use may be restricted by national regulations. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s, DCC or Wayside Channel. UN: Unused. Can be used for SVCE telephone, 64kb/s, DCC or Wayside Channel. The E1, E2 and F1 SOH bytes can be used in conjunction with the E/M Wire (MS3 SOH byte) when control signals are required (E.g. if using a PABX adapter on a SVCE Board).
280
B4017
Operators Guide
3.0
Alarm Management
Different functions are provided for acquisition, presentation and storage of alarm data: Current alarm status and historical alarm information can be collected from the network element and presented in different user interfaces. Individual alarm properties (severity, mask, name, etc.) can be customized. Historical alarm data can be logged into a database system. The different user interfaces can be displayed from context menus on the tree-nodes in the Explorer View. The Explorer View tree structure can be used as a display filter since only alarms located at the selected tree-node and below will be included in the different user interfaces. E.g. if you are only interested in alarms on received line signal for channel 1, use the alarm context menu in the \Transmission\Ch.1\Line\In node.
3.1
Alarm Data Acquisition

Alarm information can be gathered by two different methods: Polling: NEW may regularly request alarm update information from the NE. The alarm polling mechanism can be configured from the Polling dialogue box in the Fault menu. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details]. Note that alarm polling must be enabled to ensure detection of Lost contact with the NE. Notifications: The network element has the ability to instantly report alarm events. See the Notifications property sheet for details.
3.2
Alarm Severity Levels

Colours are used to indicate the alarm severity of the network element. Each alarm severity class has a corresponding colour:
B4017
281
InterLink
6HYHULW\
Normal Warning
&RORUGHIDXOW
Green Yellow
'HVFULSWLRQ
No alarms or warnings have been reported from the network element Indicates the detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault, before any significant affects have occurred. Action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem in order to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault. Indicates the existence of a non-service-affecting fault condition and that corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. Signifies that a service-affecting condition has occurred and urgent corrective action is required. The most severe alarm. It signifies that a serviceaffecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. Indicates that no communication is achieved with the network element. The NEW user is not logged on to the element.
Minor alarm Major alarm Critical alarm No contact Logged off
Dark yellow Orange Red Blue Magenta
The colors associated with the specific alarm severity levels can be customized in the Colors dialog box in the Fault menu.
Dialogue Controls: Severity list: Displays the different severity levels with the corresponding colour. Double-click in a colour cell to select a new colour. OK button: Applies the current dialogue box settings and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Defaults button: Resets the colour selections to default. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box. 282
B4017
Operators Guide 3.3 Current Alarms

NEW displays current alarm status in several different user interfaces: Explorer View: The tree-node symbols are coloured according to the highest severity level of the active alarms located at the tree-node and below. See the Explorer View section for details. Current Alarms View: Displays a list of all active alarms from the selected tree-node and below. Map View: The NE symbol is coloured according to the highest severity level of the active alarms in the NE. (Only available in NEW-NMS mode. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.) The different boards/units displays alarm status by LEDs.
3.3.1
Current Alarms View

The Current Alarms View displays the current alarms hierarchically below the selected tree-node. Note that this view has a resizeable frame.
View Controls: Number of alarms: The number of alarms displayed in the list. Freeze: When checked, the list is not updated when changes in the alarm status are detected.
B4017
283
InterLink
Alarm list: Displays all active alarms located in the selected tree-node and below. Note that a brief alarm description can be displayed from a context menu on the selected alarm. - Severity: The severity level attribute of the alarm. This level can be customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet. - Alarm text: The name of the alarm. The name can be customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet. - Node: The location of the alarm. Help button: Displays help for this View.
3.4
Historical Alarm Data

The Supervisory Board contains an alarm history log that can keep up to 10000 alarm events. These events can be uploaded to NEW and displayed in the NE Log View and/or stored in the database system. Note that the local alarm log in the NE is deleted when the Supervisory Board SW is restarted.
3.4.1
NE Alarm Log Manager

The NE Alarm Log Manager property sheet displays/configures the alarm logging mechanism on the Supervisory Board.
284
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Log full action: Determines how new events are processed when the log is full. - Wrap: The oldest log event is overwritten by the latest event. - Halt: New events are discarded. No events will be overwritten. Alarm threshold (%): An alarm (EVENT-LOG-EXC-THRESHOLD) is generated when this threshold is exceeded. Max. number of events: The maximum number of events in the log. Number of events: The current number of events in the log. Masked alarm severity levels: When checked, alarm events with the corresponding severity level will not be added to the log. View button: Uploads and displays log records from the NE log. Delete button: Deletes the entire NE log.
3.4.2
NE Alarm Log View

Historical alarm events can be uploaded from the NE and displayed in NEW. When pressing View in the NE Alarm Log Manager, a dialogue box is displayed prompting for the number of records to upload. This gives the user the possibility to reduce the upload time.
The NE Alarm Log View retrieves and displays records from the local fault log.
B4017
285
InterLink
View Controls: Number of events: The number of log records displayed in the list. Alarm event list: Displays the uploaded alarm events. - NE Log ID: Unique event identifier created by the Supervisory Board. - Status: The status change: Raised: The alarm became active. Cleared: The alarm became inactive. Floating: The alarm has been toggled 3 or more times within a 5 second window of time. - Severity: The severity level attribute of the alarm. This level can be customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet. - Node: The location of the alarm. - Alarm ID: Identifies the alarm type. Used internally to map the alarm to a corresponding name. - Alarm text: The name of the alarm. The name can be customized in the Alarm Edit property sheet. Refresh button: Removes all entries in the list and initiates a new upload of log records. Help button: Displays help for this view.
3.4.3
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of historical alarm data into a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
286
B4017
Operators Guide 3.5 Alarm Edit

The Alarm Edit property sheet displays/configures the alarm attributes.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Alarm list: Displays the alarm attributes for all alarms in the selected tree-node and below. - Node: The location of the alarm. (Cannot be modified). - Alarm ID: Identifies the alarm type. Used internally to map the alarm to a corresponding name. (Cannot be modified). - Alarm name: The name of the alarm. Note the name is not stored in the NE. If changing the name attribute, this alarm name will not appear in other instances of NEW. - Severity: The severity level associated with the alarm. - Blocking: When checked the alarm is blocked. A blocked alarm will be excluded from the current alarm status and the historical alarm logging. - Active: Whether a logical HIGH or LOW shall be regarded as an active alarm for external alarms. Modification Range: This option simplifies changing settings on identical alarms from the selected node and below. - Only selected alarm(s): Changes will only be performed on the selected alarms. - All identical alarms: Changes will be performed on all alarms in the list having the same alarm Ids as the selected alarms.
B4017
287
InterLink
To change the alarm attributes: There are two ways of editing the alarm settings in the list: In-cell editing: To edit single selections: - For the Name, Severity and Active attributes: Double-click in the cell. Change the attribute in the in-cell control (combo-box or edit box). Click outside the in-cell control. - For the Blocking attribute: Click in the cell to toggle the check button. Context menu: To edit single or multiple selections: - Select single or multiple alarms. - Right-click within the selection. - In appearing context menu, choose wanted setting. - In appearing dialogue box, edit chosen setting and press OK. - If multiple alarms have been selected, confirm editing of all alarms by pressing Yes in appearing message box. After finishing editing alarm settings, press Set to send the changes to the network element.
288
B4017
Operators Guide
4.0
Performance Measurements
Different functions are provided for acquisition, presentation and storage of performance data. Cumulative measurements, Periodic measurements (15Min, 24Hour and Month) and Thresholds can be displayed from context menus on the tree-nodes in the Explorer View. The Explorer View tree structure can be used as a display filter since only measurements located at the selected tree-node and below will be included in the different user interfaces. E.g. if you are only interested in measurements on received line signal for channel 1, use the performance context menu in the \Transmission\Ch.1\Line\In node.
4.1
Measurement Types
Error Pulses: - B1: One byte of the SOH frame is allocated for regenerator section error monitoring. This B1 byte contains a Bit Interleaved Parity 8 (BIP-8) code using even parity. The BIP-8 is computed over all bits of the previous STM-1 frame after scrambling and is placed in byte B1 of the current frame before scrambling. Parity: The number of parity errors detected. Block: The number of blocks in which one or more parity errors are detected. - B2: Three bytes of the SOH frame is allocated for multiplex section error monitoring. The B2 bytes contain a Bit Interleaved Parity 24 (BIP-24) code using even parity. The BIP-24 is computed over all bits of the previous STM-1 frame except for the first three rows of SOH and is placed in the B2 bytes of the current frame before scrambling. Parity: The number of parity errors detected. Block: The number of blocks in which one or more parity errors are detected. - M1 REI: The M1 byte of the SOH frame is allocated for multiplex section remote error indication. The M1 byte conveys the count of interleaved bit block errors that have been detected by the BIP-24 (B2) at the remote multiplex site. Parity: The number of parity errors detected. Block: The number of blocks in which one or more parity errors are detected.
B4017
289
InterLink
G.826: ITU-T Recommendation that defines standardized performance measurements. These measurements are calculated based on the block pulses described above. - B1: SES: Severely Errored Seconds. The number of one-second periods which contains > 30% errored blocks or at least one Severely Disturbed Period (SDP). A SDP is a period where Loss Of Signal (LOS) or Loss Of Frame (LOF) has been detected. SES is a subset ofES. ES: Errored Seconds. The number of one second periods with one or more errored blocks. BBE: The number of Background Block Errors. An errored block not occurring as part of an SES. UAS: The number of UnAvailable Seconds. A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be a part of the unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of ten consecutive nonSES events. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of available time. - B2: Contains SES, ES, BBE and UAS as described above. - M1 REI: Contains SES, ES, BBE and UAS as described above. OOF: Out Of Frame. - Seconds: The number of one-second periods with one or more OOF events. - Pulses: The number of OOF events detected. FEC: A Forward Error Correction function is provided in the Viterbi TCM mechanism. - Pulses: The number of Forward Error Corrections. RPS: Radio Protection Switching. See ETSI DE/TM 04037 for more information. - PSRC: Protection Switch Request Count. Counts the number of switch requests. A switch request is an activation of switch initiation criteria that may lead to automatic switches. - PSAC: Protection Switch Actual Count. Counts the number of actual switches for a regular channel to protection. - PSAD: Protection Switch Actual Duration. The number of one second periods in which a channel is actually switched for at least a fraction of that second. - PSRSAD: Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration. The number of one second periods in which, at least for fraction of that second, a protection switch request is active on a channel carrying regular traffic and the request cannot be serviced. 290
B4017
Operators Guide 4.2 Measurement Nodes

The different performance measurements are performed at Interface Baseband Boards and Modem Boards as displayed in the picture below.
Performance Measurements in a 1+1 system (Illustrates one traffic direction)
Modem BD P Transceiver Unit P Transceiver Unit P Modem BD P
Interface Baseband BD 1
Branching
Interface Baseband BD 1
Branching
Ch1
Line
Radio
Modem BD 1
Transceiver Unit 1
Transceiver Unit 1
Modem BD 1
B1, B2, M1 REI 00F B1 (Unswitched) FEC ( Unswitched) 00F ( Unswitched) (per RF Channel)
B1 (Switched) B2 (Switched) M1 REI (Switched) 00F (Switched)
The measurements performed at the Interface Baseband Board are presented at the corresponding channel in the Transmission branch in the node-tree. In a N+1 system configuration, the received radio signal path is depending on whether the channel is using protection or not. Since the Interface Baseband Board measures performance data after the RX-Switch the measurements presented in the Transmission branch are regarded as switched measurements while the measurements presented at the Modem Board are regarded as unswitched measurements in a N+1 system configuration. Measurement locations in the Explorer View node-tree: \Transmission\Channel\Radio\RX: - Error Pulses: B1, B2, M1 REI. - G.826: B1, B2, M1 REI. - OOF. \Transmission\Channel\Line\In: - Error Pulses: B1, B2, M1 REI. - G.826: B1, B2, M1 REI. - OOF. \Equipment\\Modem Board\Radio Port\RX: - Error Pulses: B1. - G.826: B1. - FEC. - OOF. - RPS: PSRC, PSAC, PSAD, PSRSAD. Only present in N+1 system 291
B4017
InterLink 4.3 Cumulative Measurements

Cumulative measurements are counting the number of errors since the last counter reset. These counters can be manually reset from NEW, and will also be reset by a SW Restart of the corresponding board/unit. The Performance Cumulative property sheet displays cumulative measurements.
Property sheet controls: Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Measurement list: Displays all measurements from the tree-node that this property-sheet was launched from and below. - Node: The location of the measurement. - Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) - SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Parity, Blocks, Seconds, etc: Measurement values (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) - Elapsed time: The elapsed time since the start of the measurement. - Status: The status of the measurement: Running: The measurement is valid and running. Unit not responding: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with the board/unit where the measurement is located. LOF: One or more Loss Of Frame events have been detected during the measurement period. (Applies to B1, B2 and M1 REI error pulses only) 292
B4017
Operators Guide
MS-AIS: One or more MS-AIS events have been detected during the measurement period. (Applies to B2 and M1 REI error pulses only) MS-RDI: One or more MS-RDI events have been detected during the measurement period. (Applies to M1 REI error pulses only) Sync loss: One or more Sync loss events have been detected during the measurement period. (Applies to FEC pulses only) Overflow: The counter has wrapped. (Applies to FEC pulses only) Reset button: Reset the cumulative counters selected in the list. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. The cumulative performance data is updated continuously (5 seconds interval).
B4017
293
InterLink 4.4 Periodic Measurements (15Min, 24Hour and Month)

Period measurements are measurements cumulated over a predefined period of time (15 minutes, 24 hours and 1month). The start times of these measurements are also predefined: 15Min measurements start at h:00:00, h:15:00, h:30:00 and h:45:00, where h denotes hour. 24Hour measurements start at each midnight (00:00:00). Month measurements start at midnight at each month transition. Note that the NE is using GMT time, such that the measurement start time is relative to GMT time and not to your PCs local time. For 15Min measurements the NE keeps the 16 latest periods. For 24Hour and Month measurements only the latest period is kept. Note that the running performance measurements will be reset due to a SW restart on the corresponding board/unit. E.g. restarting an Interface Baseband Board will reset all periodic measurements on that board. The Performance Registers property sheet displays period measurements.
294
B4017
Operators Guide
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves performance measurements from the Network Element Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Measurement list: Displays all measurements from the tree-node that this property-sheet was launched from and below. - Node: The location of the measurement. - Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) - Reg. #: The sequence number of the performance register. Register 0 is the running measurement, register 1 is the latest completed measurement, , register 16 is the oldest completed measurement. - SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Parity, Blocks, Seconds, etc: Measurement values (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) - Start time: The start time of the measurement period. - Status: The status of the measurement: Data OK: The measurement has been conducted over a complete period. Running: The measurement is not yet completed. Data not OK: Measurement period is incomplete (due to SW restart), or the NE clock has been adjusted more than 10 seconds during the measurement period. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
4.5
Thresholds
Thresholds can be configured such that alarms are generated when performance measurements exceed the specified limits. Note that performance measurements are evaluated continuously through the measurement period, and an alarm is raised immediately when the threshold value is exceeded. An active performance threshold alarm is not cleared before a measurement period has completed with a measurement value less than the corresponding threshold. Note that threshold alarms are masked by default [see the Alarm Edit property sheet]. The Performance Threshold property sheet displays/configures alarm thresholds.
B4017
295
InterLink
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Measurement list: Displays all threshold settings from the tree-node that this property-sheet was launched from and below. - Node: The location of the measurement. - Source: Measurement type (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) - Interval: The measurement period (15Min, 24Hour or Month). - SES, ES, UAS, BBE, Seconds, etc: Measurement threshold values. Double-click in the cell to edit. (See the Measurement Type section for detailed description) Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
4.6
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of G.826 measurements into a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
296
B4017
Operators Guide
5.0
Analog Measurements
Different functions are provided for acquisition and presentation of Analog measurements. In addition accumulated RF input level measurements can be displayed in the RF Statistics view.
5.1
Analog measurements
The Analog property sheet displays the current analog values. The Explorer View tree structure can be used as a display filter since only measurements located at the selected tree-node and below will be included in the Analog property sheet.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page
B4017
297
InterLink
Property page controls: Measurement list: Displays all analog measurements from the treenode that this property-sheet was launched from and below. - Node: The location of the measurement. - Analog Data: The name of the value. - Nominal: The nominal value (if a nominal value is defined) - Value: The measurement value. - Status: Status of the measurement: Data OK: The displayed data has been retrieved from the NE. Unit not responding: The Supervisory Board has lost contact with the board/unit where the measurement is located. Data not OK: The analog value cannot be read due to internal errors on the board/unit. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE.
5.2
RF Statistics
The RF input level can be collected over a period of time and displayed in a cumulative plot. The RF Statistics View can be displayed from the context menu on the \Transceiver\Antenna\RX node in the Explorer View.
298
B4017
Operators Guide
Controls: Graph: Displays a plot of the cumulative measurements. The horizontal axis represents the input level in dBm and the vertical axis represent cumulative probability. The cumulative probability is given by number of samples / total number of samples. The chart will appear when the first measurement is retrieved, but no graph will appear until fading has occurred. Number of samples: The number of samples collected and used in the plot. Polling interval: The sampling rate in seconds. Start time: The time when the measurement was started Delete Stat button: Deletes the measurements and resets the plot. Start/Stop Polling button: Starts or stops the polling for RF measurements. Note that measurements will still be collected when closing this view. The plot is not reset when polling is stopped Help button: Displays help for this view. Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and NE. The chart can be copied to the clipboard if the view has focus and Copy (Ctrl+C) is selected from the Edit menu. The chart can then be pasted into a Microsoft Word document or equal.
B4017
299
InterLink
6.0
Security Management
NEW and the InterLink network elements support access control and logging of user operations (configuration, login, logout, etc.).
6.1
User Account Administration

In order to get information from or configure a NE, the user must have a user account in NEW and a user account in the NE. When a user logs onto NEW, the same user account information (user name and password) is used to automatically log onto the discovered network elements. The access control supports four levels of user privileges: Passive: Passive users are only able to monitor data. They are not able to collect data or change the network configuration. Active: Active users are able to collect data and change configuration related to data collection (alarm editing, notifications, men at work, performance thresholds, etc.). Master: Master users have access to all NEW commands, except those attended with user account administration. Admin: Admin users have access to all NEW commands. The Admin user is the administrator and will be responsible for adding, deleting and managing user accounts and privileges. User account administration requires Admin user level. All users can change their own password.
300
B4017
Operators Guide 6.1.1 Add User

User accounts can be added to NEW and network elements from the Add User dialogue box.
Dialogue box controls: User ID: The name of the user account. The ID can contain up to 8 characters (letters and/or numbers). Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12 characters (letters and/or numbers). Confirm password: Retype the password in this field. +/- buttons: Increases/decreases the user account privileges for all selected items in the list. List: Displays all network elements that supports access control. OK button: Adds a new user to the selected elements and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Apply button: Adds a new user to the selected elements. The dialogue box remains open. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box. Note that the User ID and passwords are case sensitive.
B4017
301
InterLink 6.1.2 Edit User

Existing user accounts can be modified from the Edit User dialogue box: Modify the password Change the user level Add/Remove the user account on individual elements
Dialogue box controls: User ID: Contains the name of all user accounts detected in NEW and the discovered network elements Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12 characters (letters and/or numbers). Confirm password: Retype the password in this field. +/- buttons: Increases/decreases the user account privileges for all selected items in the list. List: Displays all network elements that supports access control. The user level No rights means that the user does not have an account in the NE. OK button: Edits the selected user account and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Apply button: Edits the selected user account. The dialogue box remains open. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box. Note that the User ID and passwords are case sensitive. 302
B4017
Operators Guide 6.1.3 Delete User

User accounts can be deleted using the Delete User dialogue box.
Dialogue box controls: User ID: Contains the name of all user accounts detected in NEW and the discovered network elements. List: Displays all network elements that contains the selected user account. OK button: Deletes the user account in the selected elements and closes the dialogue box. Cancel button: Closes the dialogue box. Apply button: Deletes the user account in the selected elements. The dialogue box remains open. Help button: Displays help for this dialogue box.
B4017
303
InterLink 6.1.4 Change Password

User may change their own password in the Change Password dialogue box.
Dialogue box controls: Old Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12 characters (letters and/or numbers). New Password: The password must contain minimum 8 and maximum 12 characters (letters and/or numbers). Confirm new password: Retype the new password in this field. Note that the passwords are case sensitive.
304
B4017
Operators Guide 6.2 Security Event Logging

The Supervisory Board stores configuration and security operations into a local security log. This log can keep up to 1000 security events. The security events can be uploaded to NEW and displayed in the NE Security Log View and/or stored in the database system. Note that the NE Security Log is not deleted when the Supervisory Board SW is restarted.
6.2.1
NE Security Log Manager

The NE Security Log Manager property sheet displays/configures the security logging mechanism on the Supervisory Board.
Property sheet controls: Get button: Retrieves the current settings from the Network Element. Set button: Sends the current control settings to the Network Element. Close button: Closes the property sheet Help button: Displays help for the active page Property page controls: Log full action: Determines how new events are processed when the log is full. - Wrap: The oldest log event is overwritten by the latest event. - Halt: New events are discarded. No events will be overwritten.
B4017
305
InterLink
Alarm threshold (%): An alarm (SECURITY-LOG-EXC-THRESHOLD) is generated when this threshold is exceeded. Max. number of events: The maximum number of events in the log. Number of events: The current number of events in the log. View button: Uploads and displays log events from the NE log. Delete button: Deletes the entire NE log.
6.2.2
NE Security Log View

Security events can be uploaded from the NE and displayed in NEW. When pressing View in the NE Security Log Manager, a dialogue box is displayed prompting for the number of events to upload. This gives the user the possibility to reduce the upload time.
The NE Security Log View retrieves and displays records from the local security log. Note that some events (user actions) are stored in the NE as two records (i.e. Add User, Edit User, Delete User), but are presented in NEW as one event.
306
B4017
Operators Guide
View Controls: Number of events: The number of log events displayed in the list. Security event list: Displays the uploaded security events. - NE Log ID: Unique event identifier created by the Supervisory Board. - User ID: The user account name for the user that performed the operation. - Operation: Brief description of the configuration or security operation performed. - Status: The status of the operation: OK: The attempted operation succeeded. Not OK: The attempted operation did not succeed (illegal configuration parameters or security violation). - Time: The date/time of the event. Refresh button: Removes all entries in the list and initiates a new upload of log records. Help button: Displays help for this view.
6.2.3
Database Logging
NEW provides functions for retrieval and logging of security events into a database system. See the NEW-NMS User Manual for details.
B4017
307
InterLink
7.0
7.1 Handset
Operation
The equipment is delivered with a DORO ROYAL handset for operation of Service Telephone.
1 2 4 7
2 5 8 0
3 6
CA LLI HIGH / NG SIG L OW NA L LE
*
3 4 5
R
11 10 9
VE L
REPEAT VOLUME
STORE/ MEMORY MIC BLOCK
7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Loudspeaker Key pad R-Button Store/Mic Block button Repeat button Connection Breakers Connector Microphone Memory button Volume control Calling signal level control
CONNECTION Connect the enclosed cable to the telephone handset and the terminal on one of the two phone connectors on the Connection Panel. To remove the cable from the handset or the Connection Panel, press the elastic pin on the cable connector and pull out the cable. 308
B4017
Operators Guide
ADJUSTABLE CALL SIGNAL A switch for adjustment of the calling signal volume, is placed on the right side of the phone. The signal has two levels; low and high. CALLING Dial the desired number Terminate the conversation by placing the handset in the holder or on a table with the CONNECTION BREAKERS facing down. REDIALING To redial the last number, push the REDIAL button. Note that only the last manually dialled number is redialled, not abbreviated numbers. ABBREVIATED NUMBERS The telephone has the capacity of storing 10 abbreviated numbers. When a number is stored as an abbreviated number, the dialling can be performed by pushing two keys only. STORING ABBREVIATED NUMBERS Lift the handset and push the STORE/MIC BLOCK button Push the MEMORY button Select the desired abbreviated number (0-9) by pushing the corresponding key number. Dial the desired telephone number (max. 21 digits). Push the STORE/MIC BLOCK button. Place the Handset on hook. To change an abbreviated number, the old number can be overwritten. Note that telephone numbers with more than 21 digits, must be stored as two or more abbreviated numbers. Dialling ABBREVIATED NUMBERS Lift the handset off hook. Push the MEMORY button Select the desired abbreviated number by pushing the keys (0-9). The corresponding abbreviated number will automatically be dialled. MICROPHONE BLOCK By pushing the STORE/MIC button, during a conversation, the microphone will be blocked. Repush the button and the microphone is active. VOLUME CONTROL The loudspeaker volume can be adjusted in two steps during a conversation, by adjusting the VOLUME control.
B4017
309
InterLink
8.0
Frequency setting
Tx Tuning
Rx Tuning
Fig. 8-1 DRO Tuning 310

B4017
Operators Guide 8.1 Setting of Frequency

Highlite the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and chose "Configuration" and "Frequency".
See Section IV para 2.1.2.5 for setting of frequency.

B4017
311
InterLink 8.2 DRO Tuning

Highlite the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and chose "Configuration" and "DRO Tuning"
8.2.1
Tx
See Section IV, para 2.1.2.5
Disabled Tx tuning Rx tuning
Select Tx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode box. Press the "Set" button. 312
B4017
Operators Guide
The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition The Alarm LED on front of the Transceiver will blink when the DRO must be turned clockwise. If the Alarm LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned counter-clockwise. When the Alarm LED is ON the Synthesizer is in lock. Press the "Set" button to update the window.
B4017
313
InterLink 8.2.2 Rx
See Section IV, para 2.1.2.5
Disabled Tx tuning Rx tuning
Select Rx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode box. Press the "Set" button.
314
B4017
Operators Guide
The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition The Alarm LED on front of the Transceiver will blink when the DRO must be turned clockwise. If the Alarm LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned counter-clockwise. When the Alarm LED is ON the Synthesizer is in lock. Press the "Set" button to update the window.
B4017
315
InterLink

316
B4017
Fault Finding
SECTION V
Fault Finding
B4017
317
InterLink

318
B4017
Fault Finding
1.0
Alarms and Description

'HVFULSWLRQ
Indicates that the NE is being upgraded /repaired by an Operator. This alarm can be set from the Equipment context menu in NEW. Event log has exceeded the predefined capacity threshold. This threshold can be configured from the "NE Alarm Log Manager" in NEW. Security log has exceeded the predefined capacity threshold. This threshold can be configured from the "NE Security Log Manager" in NEW. RPS not receiving MS1/MS2 byte information RPS not receiving MS1/MS2 byte information Remote side failed to execute requested action Remote side failed to execute requested action Protection switch failure due to unintended remote TX Bridge alteration Protection switch failure due to unintended remote TX Bridge alteration EEProm I2C not responding
$ODUP/RFDWLRQ $ODUP1DPH
Equipment MEN-AT-WORK
,'
6HYHULW\
2000 WARNING
EVENT-LOG-EXCTHRESHOLD
2011 WARNING
SECURITY-LOGEXC-THRESHOLD
2014 WARNING
RPS-OW-FAILUREDIR1 RPS-OW-FAILUREDIR2 RPS-REMOTEFAILURE-DIR1 RPS-REMOTEFAILURE-DIR2 RPS-FAIL-REMOTETXBRIDGE-DIR1 RPS-FAIL-REMOTETXBRIDGE-DIR2 Baseband Subrack Power Filtering Board I2C-INVENTORY
2450 MINOR 2451 MINOR 2452 MINOR 2453 MINOR 2454 MINOR
2455 MINOR
2019 WARNING 2018 WARNING 2019 WARNING 2033 WARNING
I2C-ANALOGUE Analogue I2C not responding I2C-INVENTORY EEProm I2C not responding SUPPLY-VOLTAGE Input power on Power Filtering Board has gone outside the predefined limits. 38V Alarm Display & I2C-ANALOGUE Analogue I2C not responding Relay Board I2C-INVENTORY EEProm I2C not responding DROP-IN 3.3V NL2000 Alarm & Display board HW alarm
2018 WARNING 2019 WARNING 2038 WARNING
B4017
319
InterLink
Supervisory Board NEED-CONFIG
'HVFULSWLRQ
The board needs configuration This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping Wizard or the Configuration Download function. The board has been placed in an illegal slot position. The board should be removed. Indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit A board/unit has been detected in an empty slot or a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a "New Board Detected" menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialog box where an appropriate action can be performed. This alarm is generated when the reset button on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit process. Analogue I2C not responding EEProm I2C not responding Download of software is under progress.
,'
6HYHULW\
3500 MAJOR
ILLEGAL-BOARDPOSITION LOST-CONTACTWITH-UNIT
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
3503 WARNING
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
3504 WARNING
I2C-ANALOGUE I2C-INVENTORY DOWNLOAD-INPROGRESS
320
B4017
Fault Finding
Supervisory Board Cont. BELOW +3.3V
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code DETECTED during startup. BELOW +48V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit RTC-LOW-BATTERY The battery that powers the Real Time clock is low. RPS-NEED-CONFIG RPS needs configuration RPS-LOSTSu lost contactvwith RPS CONTACT-WITHUNIT RSOH-PLL-DIR1 RSOH adapter Antenna Direction1. PLL out of lock RSOH-PLL-DIR2 RSOH adapter Antenna Direction2. PLL out of lock COMMON-BUSAlarm on either 64kb/s TX or ALARM 64kb/s RX commonbus MODEM-SOH-CHP- SOH timeslot alarm DIR1 (N+1) MODEM-SOH-CHP- SOH timeslot alarm DIR2 (N+1 ) MODEM-SOH-CH1- SOH timeslot alarm DIR1 MODEM-SOH-CH1- SOH timeslot alarm DIR2 MODEM-SOH-CH2- SOH timeslot alarm DIR1 (N+0) MODEM-SOH-CH2- SOH timeslot alarm DIR2 (N+0) RPS-NEED-SW The RPS module does not have valid SW XILINX-NEED-SW The Xilinx module does not have valid SW EXTERN-ALARM-1 Multipurpose port. Configured as Alarm Output, Alarm Input or Remote Control. External alarm reported if port configured as alarm input. Alarm name is configurable from "Alarm Edit" property sheet in NEW. EXTERN-ALARM-2 ref External alarm 1 EXTERN-ALARM-3 ref External alarm 1 EXTERN-ALARM-4 ref External alarm 1 EXTERN-ALARM-5 ref External alarm 1 EXTERN-ALARM-6 ref External alarm 1
2002 WARNING 2003 WARNING 2225 MINOR 2020 WARNING 2017 WARNING/ 2456 MAJOR 2457 MAJOR
1016 CRITICAL 1017 CRITICAL 1018 MINOR 1019 MINOR 1020 MINOR 1021 MINOR 1022 MINOR 1023 MINOR 1024 MINOR 2222 MAJOR 2223 MAJOR 2500 WARNING
2501 2502 2503 2504 2505
WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
B4017
321
InterLink
Supervisory Board Cont. EXTERN-ALARM-7 EXTERN-ALARM-8 NEED-SW
'HVFULSWLRQ
ref External alarm 1 ref External alarm 1 The board/unit does not have valid SW
,' 6HYHULW\
2506 WARNING 2507 WARNING 2221 MAJOR
322
B4017
Fault Finding
SVCE Board NEED-CONFIG
'HVFULSWLRQ
The board needs configuration This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping Wizard or the Configuration Download function. The board has been placed in an illegal slot position. The board should be removed. Indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit A board/unit has been detected in an empty slot or a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a "New Board Detected" menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialog box where an appropriate action can be performed. This alarm is generated when the reset button on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit process. Analogue I2C not responding EEProm I2C not responding
,'
6HYHULW\
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
3503 WARNING
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
3504 WARNING
I2C-ANALOGUE I2C-INVENTORY
B4017
2018 WARNING 2019 WARNING
323
InterLink
SVCE Board Cont. DOWNLOAD-INPROGRESS BELOW +3.3V
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
Download of software is under progress. Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +12 Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW -5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW -12 Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 64K- 1 64k Channel 1 SOH busTimeslot alarm (Tx+Rx) 64K- 2 64k Channel 2 SOH busTimeslot alarm (Tx+Rx) 64K- 3 64k Channel 3 SOH busTimeslot alarm (Tx+Rx) 64K- 4 64k Channel 4 SOH busTimeslot alarm (Tx+Rx) SERVICE-PH Service phone Commonbus timeslot alarm (Tx+Rx) 64K-LOOP-1 64 kb channel 1 loop is active 64K-LOOP-2 64 kb channel 2 loop is active 64K-LOOP-3 64 kb channel 3 loop is active 64K-LOOP-4 64 kb channel 4 loop is active NEED-SW The board/unit does not have valid SW BOOT-MONITOR-IN- ACF board is in boot monitor USE mode BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code DETECTED during startup.
2012 WARNING 2002 WARNING 2003 WARNING 2004 WARNING 2005 WARNING 2021 WARNING 2025 MINOR 2026 MINOR 2027 MINOR 2028 MINOR 2029 MINOR 2015 2016 2030 2031 2221 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING MAJOR
2224 WARNING 2225 MINOR
324
B4017
Fault Finding
Modem Board NEED-CONFIG
'HVFULSWLRQ
The board needs configuration This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping Wizard or the Configuration Download function. The board has been placed in an illegal slot position. The board should be removed. Indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit A board/unit has been detected in an empty slot or a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a "New Board Detected" menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialog box where an appropriate action can be performed. This alarm is generated when the reset button on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit process. Analogue I2C not responding EEProm I2C not responding
,'
6HYHULW\
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
NEW-BOARDDETECTED
3503 WARNING
UNIT-BEINGREPLACED
3504 WARNING
I2C-ANALOGUE I2C-INVENTORY
B4017
325
InterLink
Modem Board Cont. DOWNLOAD-INPROGRESS BELOW +3.3V
'HVFULSWLRQ
,' 6HYHULW\
2012 WARNING 2002 WARNING 2003 WARNING 2032 MAJOR
Download of software is under progress. Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit MISSINGModem or transceiver are CALIBRATIONmissing their calibration data in DATA flash RPS-BUS-FAILURE Failure to read modem RPS bus NEED-SW The board/unit does not have valid SW BOOT-MONITOR-IN- ACF board is in boot monitor USE mode BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code DETECTED during startup. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period 15MIN-PSRC exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Request Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period 15MIN-PSAC exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period 15MIN-PSAD exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Duration, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
2458 MINOR 2221 MAJOR 2224 WARNING 2225 MINOR 3018 WARNING
3019 WARNING
3020 WARNING
326
B4017
Fault Finding
Modem Board Cont. THRESHOLD15MIN-PSRSAD
'HVFULSWLRQ
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Request Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Request Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Duration, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Request Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
,'
6HYHULW\
3021 WARNING
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSRC
3022 WARNING
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSAC
3023 WARNING
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSAD
3024 WARNING
THRESHOLD24HOUR-PSRSAD
3025 WARNING
B4017
327
InterLink
Modem Board Cont. THRESHOLDMONTH-PSRC
'HVFULSWLRQ
,' 6HYHULW\
3026 WARNING
Modem Board Radio Port - TX
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Request Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period MONTH-PSAC exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period MONTH-PSAD exceeds the predefined threshold for Service Actual Duration, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. THRESHOLDIf the current 15 minute period MONTH-PSRSAD exceeds the predefined threshold for Request Service Actual Counter, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. TRELLIS PLL The Trellis coder is out of lock.(CNF35C Asic) RT-PLL The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is out of lock. IF-MOD Loss of IF 350MHz LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) LOC Loss of clock (SORP) MS-AIS-INS Alarm indication signal is inserted.
3027 WARNING
3028 WARNING
3029 WARNING
1007 CRITICAL 1008 CRITICAL 1200 2010 1011 1003 CRITICAL WARNING CRITICAL MAJOR
328
B4017
Fault Finding
Modem Board - IF-DEM Radio Port - RX RF-ID
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
Loss of incoming 140MHz. Wrong RF-ID received compared to configuration. HBER Indicator for BER > 1e-3 LBER Indicator for BER > 1e-6 EW Indicator for BER > 1e-10 LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) LOC Loss of clock (SORP) LT-PLL The Line Transmit 155MHz PLL is out of lock. CLOCK-PLL Clock-PLL out of lock CARRIER-PLL Carrier-PLL out of lock AD-TIMING-PLL AD-timing -PLL out of lock G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period 15MIN-B1 exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is set. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-B1 exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current month period MONTH-B1 exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. TRESHOLD-15MIN- If the current 15 minute period OOF exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
1300 CRITICAL 1105 MAJOR 1102 1103 1104 2010 1011 1100 1106 1107 1108 3000 MAJOR MINOR WARNING WARNING CRITICAL CRITICAL CRITICAL CRITICAL CRITICAL WARNING
3003 WARNING
3006 WARNING
3015 WARNING
B4017
329
InterLink
Modem Board - TRESHOLDRadio Port RX 24HOUR-OOF Cont.
'HVFULSWLRQ
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. If the current month period exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. The board needs configuration This alarm is generated on the board if the specific board does not contain valid system configuration data (typically after a system configuration or board replacement process). This alarm initiates an immediate configuration download from the Supervisory Board to the board. If this alarm is generated on the Supervisory Board the system configuration must be set from NEW, using the Unit Housekeeping Wizard or the Configuration Download function. The board has been placed in an illegal slot position. The board should be removed. Indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit
,'
6HYHULW\
3016 WARNING
TRESHOLDMONTH-OOF
3017 WARNING
Interface NEED-CONFIG Baseband Board
3500 MAJOR
3501 WARNING
3502 MAJOR
330
B4017
Fault Finding
Interface NEW-BOARDBaseband Board DETECTED Cont.
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
A board/unit has been detected in an empty slot or a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a "New Board Detected" menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialog box where an appropriate action can be performed. UNIT-BEINGThis alarm is generated when REPLACED the reset button on the board has been pressed for less than 2 seconds. The alarm stays active for 15 seconds and is indicated on the board by a flashing alarm diode. When this alarm is active the board can be replaced in a controlled manner. On the Supervisory Board this alarm initiates a replace unit process. I2C-ANALOGUE Analogue I2C not responding I2C-INVENTORY EEProm I2C not responding DOWNLOAD-INDownload of software is under PROGRESS progress. BELOW +3.3V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit SYNC-PLL Sync PLL out of lock WAYSIDE-LOOP-FE Wayside far-end loop on Interface Baseband Board is active WAYSIDE-LOOP-NE Wayside near-end loop on Interface Baseband Board is active PRBS-INSERTED A Pseudo Random Bit Sequence signal is inserted into the wayside channel. WAYSIDE-INP No input signal is detected on Wayside channel. WAYSIDE-AIS-INP Alarm indication signal is detected on Wayside channel. WAYSIDE-OUTPAIS is detected on the AIS Wayside traffic output. RPS-SETFailure to set on interface PROTECT-FAILED board
3503 WARNING
3504 WARNING
2018 WARNING 2019 WARNING 2012 WARNING 2002 WARNING 2003 WARNING 1012 CRITICAL 2007 WARNING
2008 WARNING
2009 WARNING
1005 MINOR 1006 WARNING 1101 WARNING 2459 MINOR
B4017
331
InterLink
Interface RPS-SET-AISBaseband Board INSERT-FAILED Cont. RPS-SET-TXBRIDGE-FAILED RPS-BUS-FAILURE
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
Failure to set on interface board Failure to set on interface board Failure to read modem RPS bus RPS-CHAN-NOTProtection switch failure due to ALIGNED no alignment NEED-SW The board/unit does not have valid SW BOOT-MONITOR-IN- ACF board is in boot monitor USE mode BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code DETECTED during startup. Interface BIAS The laser bias is out of limits. Baseband Board Sign of age and degradation. - Optical Port (SMF type only) Interface TX-OUT The output power has Baseband Board increased 2dB, or the - Optical Port analogue measurement of TX PO_MON is outside predefined limits. LASER-OFF The laser is off. LT-PLL The Line Transmit 155MHz PLL is out of lock. LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) LOC Loss of clock (SORP) Interface LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) Baseband Board LOC Loss of clock (SORP) - Optical Port RX Interface LT-PLL The Line Transmit 155MHz Baseband Board PLL is out of lock. - Electrical Port - LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) Out LOC Loss of clock (SORP) TX-LOC Loss of clock. STM-1 electrical interface Interface LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) Baseband Board LOC Loss of clock (SORP) - Electrical Port - RX-LOC Loss of clock. STM-1 electrical In interface Interface RT-PLL The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is Baseband Board out of lock. - Modem Port LOOPING-ENABLED Looping is enabled (active) TX LOC Loss of clock (SORP)
2460 MINOR 2461 MINOR 2458 MINOR 2463 MINOR 2221 MAJOR 2224 WARNING 2225 MINOR 1402 WARNING
1400 CRITICAL
1401 WARNING 1100 CRITICAL 2010 1011 2010 1011 WARNING CRITICAL WARNING CRITICAL
1100 CRITICAL 2010 WARNING 1011 CRITICAL 1014 CRITICAL 2010 WARNING 1011 CRITICAL 1013 CRITICAL 1008 CRITICAL 2010 WARNING 1011 CRITICAL
332
B4017
Fault Finding
Interface Baseband Board - Modem Port RX LOOPING-ENABLED LOC RR-PLL MS-AIS-INS
'HVFULSWLRQ
Looping is enabled (active) Loss of clock (SORP) PLL out of lock Alarm indication signal is inserted. Indicates loss of communication between the Supervisory Board and the specific board/unit
,'
2010 1011 1015 1003
6HYHULW\
WARNING CRITICAL CRITICAL MAJOR
Transceiver Unit LOST-CONTACTWITH-UNIT
3502 MAJOR
HSB-RELAY DOWNLOAD-INDownload of software is under PROGRESS progress. NEED-FREQUENCY A RF unit need to be configured with Tx and Rx frequency. MISSING Modem or transceiver are CALIBRATIONmissing their calibration data in DATA flash MISSING-LOXPIC LO synch missing SYNCHRONIZATIO N BELOW +3.3V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +11V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +15V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW +48V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit BELOW -15V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit FAN-ALARM Problem with fan FAN2-ALARM Problem with fan NEED-SW The board/unit does not have valid SW BOOT-MONITOR-IN- ACF board is in boot monitor USE mode BOOT-HW-ERROR- Errors detected by boot code DETECTED during startup. Transceiver Unit ATPC The regulation loop for the - Antenna Port ATPC is not working. Software generated alarm based on alarm condition on local LOF on Rx and remote LOF on Rx .
2012 WARNING 2013 MAJOR
2032 MAJOR
1511 CRITICAL
2002 WARNING 2003 WARNING 2022 WARNING 2023 WARNING 2020 WARNING 2024 WARNING 2034 WARNING 2037 WARNING 2221 MAJOR 2224 WARNING 2225 MINOR 1507 MINOR
B4017
333
InterLink
Transceiver Unit IF-INP - Antenna Port TX RF-OUT
'HVFULSWLRQ
IF input signal from the Modem Board is missing The output power is low. Down more than 3dB from nominal value The RF transmitter is muted. Local Oscillator is out of lock. The LO needs to be tuned Temperature warning for power transistor
,'
6HYHULW\
1500 CRITICAL 1501 MAJOR
RF-MUTE LO LO-TUNINGWARNING HIGH-TEMPPOWERTRANSISTOR Transceiver Unit RF-INPUT- Antenna Port - WARNING RX
1508 WARNING 1505 MAJOR 1512 WARNING 1513 WARNING
Empty Slot
LO LO-TUNINGWARNING ILLEGAL-BOARDPOSITION NEW-BOARDDETECTED
The RF input level is outside 1504 WARNING the predefined thresholds. These thresholds can be configured from the "RF Power" property sheet in NEW. Local Oscillator is out of lock. 1505 MAJOR The LO needs to be tuned 1512 WARNING The board has been placed in an illegal slot position. The board should be removed. A board/unit has been detected in an empty slot or a slot that is configured to be used for a different type of board/unit. When this alarm is detected by NEW the configuration context menu of the board/unit is replaced with a "New Board Detected" menu item. Select this menu command to display the NEW Board Detected dialog box where an appropriate action can be performed. Loss Of Signal: No signal is received on the interface. Loss of Frame: No valid frame is detected on the received signal. Alarm indication signal detected. MS termination only Remote defect indicator detected. MS termination only 3501 WARNING
3503 WARNING
Transmission - LOS (M) Ch. - Radio - RX LOF (M)
1000 MAJOR 1001 MAJOR
MS-AIS (M) MS-RDI (M)
334
B4017
Fault Finding
Transmission G826-TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx 15MIN-B1 (I) (*) Cont.
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is set. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period 15MIN-B2 (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for B2, this alarm is set. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period 15MIN-REI (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. TRESHOLD-15MIN- If the current 15 minute period OOF (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-B1 (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-B2 (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for B2, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
3000 WARNING
3001 WARNING
3002 WARNING
3015 WARNING
3003 WARNING
3004 WARNING
B4017
335
InterLink
Transmission - G826-TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx 24HOUR-REI (I) (*) Cont.
'HVFULSWLRQ
,' 6HYHULW\
3005 WARNING
If the current 24 hour period exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. TRESHOLDIf the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-OOF (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current month period MONTH-B1 (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current month period MONTH-B2 (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current month period MONTH-REI (I) (*) exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
3016 WARNING
3006 WARNING
3007 WARNING
3008 WARNING
336
B4017
Fault Finding
Transmission - TRESHOLDCh. - Radio - Rx MONTH-OOF (I) (*) Cont.
'HVFULSWLRQ
,' 6HYHULW\
3017 WARNING
Transmission Ch. - Line - In
If the current month period exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. RS-TRACEMismatch between configured MISMATCH (M) string and received string MS-AIS-INS (M) Alarm indication signal is inserted. MS-AIS-SWITCHED Switched Alarm indication (N+1) (I) (*) signal detected. MS termination only MS-RDI-SWITCHED Switched Remote defect (N+1) (I) (*) indicator detected. MS termination only MS-AIS-INSSwitched Alarm indication SWITCHED (N+1) (I) signal inserted. MS (*) termination only LOS (I) Loss Of Signal: No signal is received on the interface. LOF (I) Loss of Frame: No valid frame is detected on the received signal. MS-AIS (I) Alarm indication signal detected. MS termination only MS-RDI (I) Remote defect indicator detected. MS termination only G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period 15MIN-B1 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is set. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 15 minute period 15MIN-B2 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for B2, this alarm is set. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
1010 MAJOR 1003 MAJOR 1027 WARNING
1028 WARNING
1029 MAJOR
1000 MAJOR 1001 MAJOR
3001 WARNING
B4017
337
InterLink
Transmission Ch. - Line - In Cont. G826-TRESHOLD15MIN-REI (I)
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
If the current 15 minute period exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. TRESHOLD-15MIN- If the current 15 minute period OOF (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-B1 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for B1, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-B2 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for B2, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLD- If the current 24 hour period 24HOUR-REI (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW.
3002 WARNING
3015 WARNING
3003 WARNING
3004 WARNING
3005 WARNING
338
B4017
Fault Finding
Transmission Ch. - Line - In Cont. TRESHOLD24HOUR-OOF (I)
'HVFULSWLRQ
,'
6HYHULW\
3016 WARNING If the current 24 hour period exceeds the predefined threshold for OOF, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. 3006 WARNING G826-TRESHOLDIf the current month period MONTH-B1 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. G826-TRESHOLDIf the current month period 3007 WARNING MONTH-B2 (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. 3008 WARNING G826-TRESHOLDIf the current month period MONTH-REI (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for REI, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. Only for MS termination. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. 3017 WARNING TRESHOLDIf the current month period MONTH-OOF (I) exceeds the predefined threshold for month, this alarm is raised. The alarm is cleared when a new period starts. The threshold can be configured from the "Performance Thresholds" property sheet in NEW. RS-TRACEMismatch between configured 1010 MAJOR MISMATCH (I) string and received string MS-AIS-INS (I) Alarm indication signal is 1003 MAJOR inserted. (M): Alarm is detected on corresponding Modem Board (I): Alarm is detected on corresponding Interface Baseband Board. (*) On N+1 systems with no Low Priority Traffic there are no Interface Baseband Boards for Ch.P and the alarms marked (I) are not present in the Transmission - Ch. - Radio - RX node.
B4017
339
InterLink

340
B4017
Unit Replacement
SECTION VI
Unit Replacement
B4017
341
InterLink

342
B4017
Unit Replacement
1.0
Unit Removal
To remove the Transceiver from the shelf, loosen the four screws, one in each corner of the Transceiver front and pull the unit out carefully. Fig. 1-1 Removing Transceiver from shelf
B4017
343
InterLink
Fig. 1-2 Removing Sub-Rack cover
344
B4017
Unit Replacement
Fig. 1-3 Removing Boards from Sub-Rack
B4017
345
InterLink

346
B4017
Appendices
Section VII
Appendices
B4017
347
InterLink

348
B4017
Appendices
Appendix I
1.0 4 GHz
Frequency Plans
Channel frequencies for the 4 GHz frequency band with 29 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.382-7 and in CEPT 12-08 E Annex B, 1
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6
5)IUHT >0+]@
3824.5 3853.5 3882.5 3911.5 3940.5 3969.5
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6
5)IUHT >0+]@
4037.5 4066.5 4095.5 4124.5 4153.5 4182.5
Channel frequencies for the 4 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.635-6 Annex 1,6
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5)IUHT >0+]@
3 620 3 650 3 680 3 710 3 740 3 770 3 800 3 830 3 860
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5)IUHT >0+]@
3 940 3 970 4 000 4 030 4 060 4 090 4 120 4 150 4 180
B4017
349
InterLink
Channel frequencies for the 4 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.635-6 Annex 1, 3a
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
3620 3660 3700 3740 3780 3820 3860
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
3940 3980 4020 4060 4100 4140 4180
Channel frequencies for the 4 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in CEPT 12-08 E Annex A, 1
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
3 610 3 650 3 690 3 730 3 770 3 810 3 850
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
3 930 3 970 4 010 4 050 4 090 4 130 4 170
350
B4017
Appendices 2.0 5 GHz

Channel frequencies for the 5 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.746-5 Annex 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5)IUHT >0+]@
4418 4446 4474 4502 4530 4558 4586 4614 4642 4670
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5)IUHT >0+]@
4730 4758 4786 4814 4842 4870 4898 4926 4954 4982
Channel frequencies for the 5 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.1099-3 Annex 1, 1
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
4430 4470 4510 4550 4590 4630 4670
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5)IUHT >0+]@
4730 4770 4810 4850 4890 4930 4970
B4017
351
InterLink 3.0 Lower 6 GHz

Channel frequencies for the lower 6 GHz band with 29.65 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.383-7, CEPT 14-01 E, FCC Part 101, 101.147 (i)(8) (US) and SRSP-305.9 Group A (Canada)
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
5945.20 5974.85 6004.50 6034.15 6063.80 6093.45 6123.10 6152.75
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6197.24 6226.89 6256.54 6286.19 6315.84 6345.49 6375.14 6404.79
Channel frequencies for the lower 6 GHz band with 29.65 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP-305.9 Group B (Canada)
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
5930.37 5960.02 5989.67 6019.32 6048.97 6078.62 6108.27 6137.92
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6182.41 6212.06 6241.71 6271.36 6301.01 6330.66 6360.31 6489.96
352
B4017
Appendices 4.0 Upper 6 GHz

Channel frequencies for the upper 6 GHz band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.384-7
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6460 6500 6540 6580 6620 6660 6700 6740
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6800 6840 6880 6920 6960 7000 7040 7080
Channel frequencies for the upper 6 GHz band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP 306.4 (Canada)
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6445 6475 6505 6535 6565 6595 6625 6655
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
6785 6815 6845 6875 6905 6695 6725 6755
B4017
353
InterLink 5.0 7 GHz

Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 3, lower part
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7121 7149 7177 7205 7233
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7317 7345 7373 7401 7429
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.385-7 Rec. 1-4, Arrangement #1
Q
1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7138,5 7166,5 7195,5 7222,5
Q

1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7299,5 7327,5 7355,5 7383,5
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in CEPT 02-06 Annex 1
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7142 7170 7198 7226 7254
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
354
B4017
Appendices
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7128 7156 7184 7212 7240
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7289 7317 7345 7373 7401
1
1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7149 7177 7205 7233
Q

1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7310 7338 7366 7394
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP-307.1 Sub-plan I (Canada)
Q
1
5)IUHT >0+]@
7140
Q

1
5)IUHT >0+]@
7315
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP-307.1 Sub-plan II (Canada)
Q
1
5)IUHT >0+]@
7440
Q

1
5)IUHT >0+]@
7590
B4017
355
InterLink
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7596 7624 7652 7680 7708
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 3, upper part
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7457 7485 7513 7541 7569
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7625 7653 7681 7709 7737
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7428 7456 7484 7512 7540
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7610 7638 7666 7694 7722
356
B4017
Appendices
Q
1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7456 7484 7512 7540
Q

1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7610 7638 7666 7694
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.385-7 Rec. 1-4 Arr. #3
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7438.5 7466.5 7494.5 7522.5 7550.5
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7599.5 7627.5 7655.5 7683.5 7711.5
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7428 7456 7484 7512 7540
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
7589 7617 7645 7673 7701
B4017
357
InterLink
Q
1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7466,5 7494,5 7522,5 7550,5
Q

1 2 3 4
5)IUHT >0+]@
7627,5 7655,5 7683,5 7711,5
Channel frequencies for the 7 GHz frequency band (UK) with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 4
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7582 7610 7638
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
7687 7715 7743 7771 7799 7827 7855 7883
358
B4017

Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 29.65 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
7747.70 7777.35 7807.00 7836.65 7866.30 7895.95 7925.60 7955.25
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
8059.02 8088.67 8118.32 8147.97 8177.62 8207.27 8236.92 8266.57
Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 29.65 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 1, 4
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7732.875 7762.525 7792.175 7821.825 7851.475 7881.125 7910.775 7940.425
5)IUHT >0+]@
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8044.195 8073.845 8103.495 8133.145 8162.795 8192.445 8222.095 8251.745
5)IUHT >0+]@
Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.386-6 Annex 4
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066 8094 8122
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332 8360 8388
B4017
359
InterLink
Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in CEPT 02-06 Annex 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5)IUHT >0+]@
7919 7947 7975 8003 8031 8059 8087 8115 8143 8171
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5)IUHT >0+]@
8229 8257 8285 8313 8341 8369 8397 8425 8453 8481
Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 28 MHz channel spacing as defined in NL2008C (8.2-8.5 GHz): Additional channel arrangement #1
Q
1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
8217 8245 8273 8301 8329
Q

1 2 3 4 5
5)IUHT >0+]@
8371 8399 8427 8455 8483
Channel frequencies for the 8 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP-307.7 (Canada)
Q
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
7740 7770 7800 7830 7860 7890 7920 7950
Q

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5)IUHT >0+]@
8040 8070 8100 8130 8160 8190 8220 8250
360
B4017

Channel frequencies for the 11 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.387-8 Rec. 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
10715 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 10955 10995 11035 11075 11115 11155
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
11245 11285 11325 11365 11405 11445 11485 11525 11565 11605 11645 11685
Channel frequencies for the 11 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.387-8 Annex 1 and CEPT 12-06 Rec. 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665
B4017
361
InterLink
Channel frequencies for the 11 GHz frequency band with 40 MHz channel spacing as defined in ITU-R F.387-8 Annex 2, CEPT 12-06 Rec. 3, FCC 101.147 (o-7)(US) and SRSP-310.7 (D/D)(Canada)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
10735 10775 10815 10855 10895 10935 10975 11015 11055 11095 11135 11175
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5)IUHT >0+]@
11225 11265 11305 11345 11385 11425 11465 11505 11545 11585 11625 11665
Channel frequencies for the 11 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in FCC Part 101, 101.147 (o-6)(US)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5)IUHT >0+]@
10715 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 10955 10995 11035 11075 11115 11155 11185
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5)IUHT >0+]@
11215 11245 11285 11325 11365 11405 11445 11485 11525 11565 11605 11645 11685
362
B4017
Appendices
Channel frequencies for the 11 GHz frequency band with 30 MHz channel spacing as defined in SRSP-310.7 (C/C) (Canada)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5)IUHT >0+]@
10725 10755 10785 10815 10845 10975 10905 10935 10965 10995 11025 11055 11085 11115 11145 11175
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5)IUHT >0+]@
11215 11245 11275 11305 11335 11365 11395 11425 11455 11485 11515 11545 11575 11605 11635 11665
B4017
363
InterLink

364
B4017

Interlink Rev.d

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Interlink Rev.d

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

USER MANUAL InterLink

Section I Section II Section III Section IV Section V Section VI Section VII

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

LITHIUM BATTERY WARNING!

This page is intentionally left blank

This section applies only to CE marked equipment

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)

Swedish Danish German

Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.

This page is intentionally left blank

This page is intentionally left blank

SECTION III ........................................................... 91

SECTION IV ........................................................... 135

Operation...................................................................... 308 7.1 Handset ........................................................... 308

SECTION V ........................................................... 317

SECTION VI........................................................... 341

SECTION VII .......................................................... 347

This page is intentionally left blank

System Configurations Definitions and terms used

Available system configurations

7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 3RO 3ROV

'RXEOH7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 &&'3 3RO 3ROV ;3,&

Table 2.1.3.1 Available system configurations

InterLink 2.2 2.2.1 System Layouts Definitions and terms used

System Description 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Main racks ETSI and 19 variants

InterLink 2.2.2.2 Waveguide runs

%UDQFKLQJZLWKRXWILOWHU DQG:*OD\RXW W\SLFDO

TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3 IC1

NPUT I OUT PUT

NPUT I OUT PUT

TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3 IC1

Figure 2.2.2.2.1 An example of the placing of waveguide runs 34

:*0DLQ SRO+ 9 'LU  :*6' SRO+ 9 'LU 

:*0DLQ SRO9 + 'LU  :*6' SRO9 + 'LU 

Subracks - Smaller Systems

Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version

3  K  K K & & &

J1 (EXT (EXT CON) CON) J1

Fig. 2.2.3.1 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack standard version

Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version

 3 K K  K & & &

Fig. 2.2.3.2 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack reversed version

Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version

Fig. 2.2.3.3 Combined transceiver and baseband subrack split version

TRANSCEIVERPOWERC ONNECTIONS TB2 TB3

Layout of Smaller Systems 1 subrack systems

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

2+0 2+0 2+0 2+0

InterLink 2.2.4 Subracks - Larger Systems

&K3 &K &K &K + 9 + 9 9 + 9 +

Fig. 2.2.4.1 Transceiver subrack

System Description 2.2.4.2 Baseband subrack

Fig. 2.2.4.2 Baseband subrack

Baseband subrack - 3 channel systems

Fig. 2.2.4.3 Baseband subrack for 3 channel systems

TRANSCEIVER POWER CONNECTIONS TB2 TB3

J1 (EXT (EXT CON) CON) J1

InterLink 2.2.4.4 Auxiliary subrack

Fig. 2.2.4.4 Auxiliary subrack

7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 3RO 3ROV

'RXEOH7HUPLQDO $&$3$&&3 &&'3 3RO 3ROV ;3,&

%UDQFKLQJZLWKRXWILOWHU DQG:*OD\RXWW\SLFDO

:0DLQ SRO+9'LU :6' SRO+9'LU

:0DLQ SRO9+'LU :6' SRO9+'LU

3 K K K & & &

3 K K K & & &

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

&K3 &K &K &K +9 +9 9+ 9+

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

3 & & $ 3 $ & $

5(* 6(59,&( &+$11(/

NEV NEV $'$37(5 $'$37(5

'&'& 9 &RQYHUWHU !9

7[,) 0+] 5[,) 0+] 07FRP

3RZHU $PSOLILHU /2,0'P[U

,)ORRS 6\QWKHVL]HU8QLW ,) 6\QW 7[ 6\QW 5[ 6\QW 7[/2

'&'& )/75 $*&

$'&&DEOHVDQG *URXQGLQJ &%DVLF6HUYLFH.LW

:,'7+ '(37+

:,'7+ '(37+

:,'7+ '(37+

:,'7+ '(37+